790b52f0251f2558d67273e2879d75754ea34341
[deliverable/binutils-gdb.git] / ld / ld.texinfo
1 \input texinfo
2 @setfilename ld.info
3 @c Copyright (C) 1991-2017 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
4 @syncodeindex ky cp
5 @c man begin INCLUDE
6 @include configdoc.texi
7 @c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
8 @include bfdver.texi
9 @c man end
10
11 @c @smallbook
12
13 @macro gcctabopt{body}
14 @code{\body\}
15 @end macro
16
17 @c man begin NAME
18 @ifset man
19 @c Configure for the generation of man pages
20 @set UsesEnvVars
21 @set GENERIC
22 @set ARM
23 @set C6X
24 @set H8300
25 @set HPPA
26 @set I960
27 @set M68HC11
28 @set M68K
29 @set MIPS
30 @set MMIX
31 @set MSP430
32 @set NDS32
33 @set NIOSII
34 @set POWERPC
35 @set POWERPC64
36 @set Renesas
37 @set SPU
38 @set TICOFF
39 @set WIN32
40 @set XTENSA
41 @end ifset
42 @c man end
43
44 @ifnottex
45 @dircategory Software development
46 @direntry
47 * Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
48 @end direntry
49 @end ifnottex
50
51 @copying
52 This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD
53 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
54 @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
55 @end ifset
56 version @value{VERSION}.
57
58 Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2017 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
59
60 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
61 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
62 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
63 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
64 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
65 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
66 @end copying
67 @iftex
68 @finalout
69 @setchapternewpage odd
70 @settitle The GNU linker
71 @titlepage
72 @title The GNU linker
73 @sp 1
74 @subtitle @code{ld}
75 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
76 @subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
77 @end ifset
78 @subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
79 @author Steve Chamberlain
80 @author Ian Lance Taylor
81 @page
82
83 @tex
84 {\parskip=0pt
85 \hfill Red Hat Inc\par
86 \hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
87 \hfill {\it The GNU linker}\par
88 \hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
89 }
90 \global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
91 @end tex
92
93 @vskip 0pt plus 1filll
94 @c man begin COPYRIGHT
95 Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2017 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
96
97 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
98 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
99 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
100 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
101 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
102 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
103 @c man end
104
105 @end titlepage
106 @end iftex
107 @contents
108 @c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
109
110 @ifnottex
111 @node Top
112 @top LD
113 This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld
114 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
115 @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
116 @end ifset
117 version @value{VERSION}.
118
119 This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
120 Documentation License version 1.3. A copy of the license is included
121 in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
122
123 @menu
124 * Overview:: Overview
125 * Invocation:: Invocation
126 * Scripts:: Linker Scripts
127 @ifset GENERIC
128 * Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
129 @end ifset
130 @ifclear GENERIC
131 @ifset H8300
132 * H8/300:: ld and the H8/300
133 @end ifset
134 @ifset Renesas
135 * Renesas:: ld and other Renesas micros
136 @end ifset
137 @ifset I960
138 * i960:: ld and the Intel 960 family
139 @end ifset
140 @ifset ARM
141 * ARM:: ld and the ARM family
142 @end ifset
143 @ifset M68HC11
144 * M68HC11/68HC12:: ld and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
145 @end ifset
146 @ifset HPPA
147 * HPPA ELF32:: ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
148 @end ifset
149 @ifset M68K
150 * M68K:: ld and Motorola 68K family
151 @end ifset
152 @ifset MIPS
153 * MIPS:: ld and MIPS family
154 @end ifset
155 @ifset POWERPC
156 * PowerPC ELF32:: ld and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
157 @end ifset
158 @ifset POWERPC64
159 * PowerPC64 ELF64:: ld and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
160 @end ifset
161 @ifset SPU
162 * SPU ELF:: ld and SPU ELF Support
163 @end ifset
164 @ifset TICOFF
165 * TI COFF:: ld and the TI COFF
166 @end ifset
167 @ifset WIN32
168 * Win32:: ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
169 @end ifset
170 @ifset XTENSA
171 * Xtensa:: ld and Xtensa Processors
172 @end ifset
173 @end ifclear
174 @ifclear SingleFormat
175 * BFD:: BFD
176 @end ifclear
177 @c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
178
179 * Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
180 * MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
181 * GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
182 * LD Index:: LD Index
183 @end menu
184 @end ifnottex
185
186 @node Overview
187 @chapter Overview
188
189 @cindex @sc{gnu} linker
190 @cindex what is this?
191
192 @ifset man
193 @c man begin SYNOPSIS
194 ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
195 @c man end
196
197 @c man begin SEEALSO
198 ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
199 the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
200 @file{ld}.
201 @c man end
202 @end ifset
203
204 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
205
206 @command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
207 their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
208 compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
209
210 @command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
211 a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
212 to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
213
214 @ifset man
215 @c For the man only
216 This man page does not describe the command language; see the
217 @command{ld} entry in @code{info} for full details on the command
218 language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
219 @end ifset
220
221 @ifclear SingleFormat
222 This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
223 to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
224 write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
225 @code{a.out}. Different formats may be linked together to produce any
226 available kind of object file. @xref{BFD}, for more information.
227 @end ifclear
228
229 Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
230 linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
231 execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
232 @command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
233 (or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
234
235 @c man end
236
237 @node Invocation
238 @chapter Invocation
239
240 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
241
242 The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
243 and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result,
244 you have many choices to control its behavior.
245
246 @c man end
247
248 @ifset UsesEnvVars
249 @menu
250 * Options:: Command Line Options
251 * Environment:: Environment Variables
252 @end menu
253
254 @node Options
255 @section Command Line Options
256 @end ifset
257
258 @cindex command line
259 @cindex options
260
261 @c man begin OPTIONS
262
263 The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
264 practice few of them are used in any particular context.
265 @cindex standard Unix system
266 For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
267 object files on a standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to
268 link a file @code{hello.o}:
269
270 @smallexample
271 ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
272 @end smallexample
273
274 This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
275 result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
276 the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
277 directories. (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
278
279 Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
280 point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
281 as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
282 which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
283 files and other file options. Repeating non-file options with a
284 different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
285 occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
286 option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
287 noted in the descriptions below.
288
289 @cindex object files
290 Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
291 together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
292 options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
293 an option and its argument.
294
295 Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
296 specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
297 and the script command language. If @emph{no} binary input files at all
298 are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
299 message @samp{No input files}.
300
301 If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
302 assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
303 augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
304 linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}). This feature
305 permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
306 or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
307 @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects. Specifying a
308 script in this way merely augments the main linker script, with the
309 extra commands placed after the main script; use the @samp{-T} option
310 to replace the default linker script entirely, but note the effect of
311 the @code{INSERT} command. @xref{Scripts}.
312
313 For options whose names are a single letter,
314 option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
315 whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
316 option that requires them.
317
318 For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
319 precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
320 @samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent. Note---there is one exception to
321 this rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
322 only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
323 @samp{-o} option. So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
324 name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
325 output.
326
327 Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
328 option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
329 immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
330 @samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
331 Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
332 accepted.
333
334 Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
335 (e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command line options should be
336 prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
337 compiler driver) like this:
338
339 @smallexample
340 gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group
341 @end smallexample
342
343 This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
344 silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link. Confusion
345 may also arise when passing options that require values through a
346 driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as
347 a separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker
348 and the argument to the compiler. In this case, it is simplest to use
349 the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as:
350
351 @smallexample
352 gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map
353 @end smallexample
354
355 Here is a table of the generic command line switches accepted by the GNU
356 linker:
357
358 @table @gcctabopt
359 @include at-file.texi
360
361 @kindex -a @var{keyword}
362 @item -a @var{keyword}
363 This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The @var{keyword}
364 argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
365 @samp{default}. @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
366 @samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
367 to @samp{-Bdynamic}. This option may be used any number of times.
368
369 @kindex --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
370 @item --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
371 Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_AUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
372 @var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
373 specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_AUDIT}
374 will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. If the linker
375 finds an object with an audit entry while searching for shared libraries,
376 it will add a corresponding @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry in the output file.
377 This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit
378 interface.
379
380 @ifset I960
381 @cindex architectures
382 @kindex -A @var{arch}
383 @item -A @var{architecture}
384 @kindex --architecture=@var{arch}
385 @itemx --architecture=@var{architecture}
386 In the current release of @command{ld}, this option is useful only for the
387 Intel 960 family of architectures. In that @command{ld} configuration, the
388 @var{architecture} argument identifies the particular architecture in
389 the 960 family, enabling some safeguards and modifying the
390 archive-library search path. @xref{i960,,@command{ld} and the Intel 960
391 family}, for details.
392
393 Future releases of @command{ld} may support similar functionality for
394 other architecture families.
395 @end ifset
396
397 @ifclear SingleFormat
398 @cindex binary input format
399 @kindex -b @var{format}
400 @kindex --format=@var{format}
401 @cindex input format
402 @cindex input format
403 @item -b @var{input-format}
404 @itemx --format=@var{input-format}
405 @command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
406 file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
407 @samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
408 that follow this option on the command line. Even when @command{ld} is
409 configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
410 to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
411 default input format the most usual format on each machine.
412 @var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
413 supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the available binary
414 formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
415 @xref{BFD}.
416
417 You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
418 binary format. You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
419 linking object files of different formats), by including
420 @samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
421 particular format.
422
423 The default format is taken from the environment variable
424 @code{GNUTARGET}.
425 @ifset UsesEnvVars
426 @xref{Environment}.
427 @end ifset
428 You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
429 @code{TARGET};
430 @ifclear man
431 see @ref{Format Commands}.
432 @end ifclear
433 @end ifclear
434
435 @kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
436 @kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
437 @cindex compatibility, MRI
438 @item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
439 @itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
440 For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
441 files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
442 @ifclear man
443 @ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
444 @end ifclear
445 @ifset man
446 the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
447 @end ifset
448 Introduce MRI script files with
449 the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
450 scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
451 If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
452 specified by any @samp{-L} options.
453
454 @cindex common allocation
455 @kindex -d
456 @kindex -dc
457 @kindex -dp
458 @item -d
459 @itemx -dc
460 @itemx -dp
461 These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
462 compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common symbols
463 even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}). The
464 script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
465 @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
466
467 @kindex --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
468 @kindex -P @var{AUDITLIB}
469 @item --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
470 @itemx -P @var{AUDITLIB}
471 Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
472 @var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
473 specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_DEPAUDIT}
474 will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. This
475 option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit interface.
476 The -P option is provided for Solaris compatibility.
477
478 @cindex entry point, from command line
479 @kindex -e @var{entry}
480 @kindex --entry=@var{entry}
481 @item -e @var{entry}
482 @itemx --entry=@var{entry}
483 Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
484 program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no symbol
485 named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
486 and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
487 base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
488 @samp{0} for base 8). @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
489 and other ways of specifying the entry point.
490
491 @kindex --exclude-libs
492 @item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
493 Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
494 exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons. Specifying
495 @code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
496 automatic export. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted
497 port of the linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols
498 explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of this
499 option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will
500 be treated as hidden.
501
502 @kindex --exclude-modules-for-implib
503 @item --exclude-modules-for-implib @var{module},@var{module},...
504 Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which symbols
505 should not be automatically exported, but which should be copied wholesale
506 into the import library being generated during the link. The module names
507 may be delimited by commas or colons, and must match exactly the filenames
508 used by @command{ld} to open the files; for archive members, this is simply
509 the member name, but for object files the name listed must include and
510 match precisely any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
511 command-line. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port
512 of the linker. Symbols explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported,
513 regardless of this option.
514
515 @cindex dynamic symbol table
516 @kindex -E
517 @kindex --export-dynamic
518 @kindex --no-export-dynamic
519 @item -E
520 @itemx --export-dynamic
521 @itemx --no-export-dynamic
522 When creating a dynamically linked executable, using the @option{-E}
523 option or the @option{--export-dynamic} option causes the linker to add
524 all symbols to the dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table is the
525 set of symbols which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
526
527 If you do not use either of these options (or use the
528 @option{--no-export-dynamic} option to restore the default behavior), the
529 dynamic symbol table will normally contain only those symbols which are
530 referenced by some dynamic object mentioned in the link.
531
532 If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
533 back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
534 dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
535 linking the program itself.
536
537 You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
538 be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
539 See the description of @samp{--dynamic-list}.
540
541 Note that this option is specific to ELF targeted ports. PE targets
542 support a similar function to export all symbols from a DLL or EXE; see
543 the description of @samp{--export-all-symbols} below.
544
545 @ifclear SingleFormat
546 @cindex big-endian objects
547 @cindex endianness
548 @kindex -EB
549 @item -EB
550 Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
551
552 @cindex little-endian objects
553 @kindex -EL
554 @item -EL
555 Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
556 @end ifclear
557
558 @kindex -f @var{name}
559 @kindex --auxiliary=@var{name}
560 @item -f @var{name}
561 @itemx --auxiliary=@var{name}
562 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
563 to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
564 table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
565 symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
566
567 If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
568 run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field. If
569 the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
570 first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
571 @var{name}. If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
572 in the filter object. The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
573 Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
574 implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
575 machine specific performance.
576
577 This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY entries
578 will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
579
580 @kindex -F @var{name}
581 @kindex --filter=@var{name}
582 @item -F @var{name}
583 @itemx --filter=@var{name}
584 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
585 the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
586 of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
587 on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
588
589 If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
590 run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field. The
591 dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
592 filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
593 found in the shared object @var{name}. Thus the filter object can be
594 used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
595 @var{name}.
596
597 Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
598 toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
599 object files.
600 @ifclear SingleFormat
601 The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
602 @option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
603 @code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
604 environment variable.
605 @end ifclear
606 The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
607 creating an ELF shared object.
608
609 @cindex finalization function
610 @kindex -fini=@var{name}
611 @item -fini=@var{name}
612 When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
613 executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
614 address of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
615 the function to call.
616
617 @kindex -g
618 @item -g
619 Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
620
621 @kindex -G @var{value}
622 @kindex --gpsize=@var{value}
623 @cindex object size
624 @item -G @var{value}
625 @itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
626 Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
627 @var{size}. This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
628 MIPS ELF that support putting large and small objects into different
629 sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
630
631 @cindex runtime library name
632 @kindex -h @var{name}
633 @kindex -soname=@var{name}
634 @item -h @var{name}
635 @itemx -soname=@var{name}
636 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
637 the specified name. When an executable is linked with a shared object
638 which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
639 linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
640 field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
641
642 @kindex -i
643 @cindex incremental link
644 @item -i
645 Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
646
647 @cindex initialization function
648 @kindex -init=@var{name}
649 @item -init=@var{name}
650 When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
651 executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
652 of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
653 function to call.
654
655 @cindex archive files, from cmd line
656 @kindex -l @var{namespec}
657 @kindex --library=@var{namespec}
658 @item -l @var{namespec}
659 @itemx --library=@var{namespec}
660 Add the archive or object file specified by @var{namespec} to the
661 list of files to link. This option may be used any number of times.
662 If @var{namespec} is of the form @file{:@var{filename}}, @command{ld}
663 will search the library path for a file called @var{filename}, otherwise it
664 will search the library path for a file called @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.
665
666 On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
667 files other than @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. Specifically, on ELF
668 and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library
669 called @file{lib@var{namespec}.so} before searching for one called
670 @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. (By convention, a @code{.so} extension
671 indicates a shared library.) Note that this behavior does not apply
672 to @file{:@var{filename}}, which always specifies a file called
673 @var{filename}.
674
675 The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
676 specified on the command line. If the archive defines a symbol which
677 was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
678 command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
679 archive. However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
680 the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
681
682 See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
683 archives multiple times.
684
685 You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
686
687 @ifset GENERIC
688 This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. However,
689 if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
690 behaviour of the AIX linker.
691 @end ifset
692
693 @cindex search directory, from cmd line
694 @kindex -L @var{dir}
695 @kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
696 @item -L @var{searchdir}
697 @itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
698 Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
699 for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts. You may use this
700 option any number of times. The directories are searched in the order
701 in which they are specified on the command line. Directories specified
702 on the command line are searched before the default directories. All
703 @option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
704 order in which the options appear. @option{-L} options do not affect
705 how @command{ld} searches for a linker script unless @option{-T}
706 option is specified.
707
708 If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=} or @code{$SYSROOT}, then this
709 prefix will be replaced by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, controlled by the
710 @samp{--sysroot} option, or specified when the linker is configured.
711
712 @ifset UsesEnvVars
713 The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
714 @samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
715 some cases also on how it was configured. @xref{Environment}.
716 @end ifset
717
718 The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
719 @code{SEARCH_DIR} command. Directories specified this way are searched
720 at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
721
722 @cindex emulation
723 @kindex -m @var{emulation}
724 @item -m @var{emulation}
725 Emulate the @var{emulation} linker. You can list the available
726 emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
727
728 If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
729 @code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
730
731 Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
732 configured.
733
734 @cindex link map
735 @kindex -M
736 @kindex --print-map
737 @item -M
738 @itemx --print-map
739 Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
740 information about the link, including the following:
741
742 @itemize @bullet
743 @item
744 Where object files are mapped into memory.
745 @item
746 How common symbols are allocated.
747 @item
748 All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
749 which caused the archive member to be brought in.
750 @item
751 The values assigned to symbols.
752
753 Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression which
754 involves a reference to a previous value of the same symbol may not
755 have correct result displayed in the link map. This is because the
756 linker discards intermediate results and only retains the final value
757 of an expression. Under such circumstances the linker will display
758 the final value enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a
759 linker script containing:
760
761 @smallexample
762 foo = 1
763 foo = foo * 4
764 foo = foo + 8
765 @end smallexample
766
767 will produce the following output in the link map if the @option{-M}
768 option is used:
769
770 @smallexample
771 0x00000001 foo = 0x1
772 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
773 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
774 @end smallexample
775
776 See @ref{Expressions} for more information about expressions in linker
777 scripts.
778 @end itemize
779
780 @kindex -n
781 @cindex read-only text
782 @cindex NMAGIC
783 @kindex --nmagic
784 @item -n
785 @itemx --nmagic
786 Turn off page alignment of sections, and disable linking against shared
787 libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
788 mark the output as @code{NMAGIC}.
789
790 @kindex -N
791 @kindex --omagic
792 @cindex read/write from cmd line
793 @cindex OMAGIC
794 @item -N
795 @itemx --omagic
796 Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, do
797 not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
798 libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
799 mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. Note: Although a writable text section
800 is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to the format
801 specification published by Microsoft.
802
803 @kindex --no-omagic
804 @cindex OMAGIC
805 @item --no-omagic
806 This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option. It
807 sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
808 be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking against
809 shared libraries. Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
810
811 @kindex -o @var{output}
812 @kindex --output=@var{output}
813 @cindex naming the output file
814 @item -o @var{output}
815 @itemx --output=@var{output}
816 Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
817 option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default. The
818 script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
819
820 @kindex -O @var{level}
821 @cindex generating optimized output
822 @item -O @var{level}
823 If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
824 the output. This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
825 should only be enabled for the final binary. At the moment this
826 option only affects ELF shared library generation. Future releases of
827 the linker may make more use of this option. Also currently there is
828 no difference in the linker's behaviour for different non-zero values
829 of this option. Again this may change with future releases.
830
831 @kindex -plugin @var{name}
832 @item -plugin @var{name}
833 Involve a plugin in the linking process. The @var{name} parameter is
834 the absolute filename of the plugin. Usually this parameter is
835 automatically added by the complier, when using link time
836 optimization, but users can also add their own plugins if they so
837 wish.
838
839 Note that the location of the compiler originated plugins is different
840 from the place where the @command{ar}, @command{nm} and
841 @command{ranlib} programs search for their plugins. In order for
842 those commands to make use of a compiler based plugin it must first be
843 copied into the @file{$@{libdir@}/bfd-plugins} directory. All gcc
844 based linker plugins are backward compatible, so it is sufficient to
845 just copy in the newest one.
846
847 @kindex --push-state
848 @cindex push state governing input file handling
849 @item --push-state
850 The @option{--push-state} allows to preserve the current state of the
851 flags which govern the input file handling so that they can all be
852 restored with one corresponding @option{--pop-state} option.
853
854 The option which are covered are: @option{-Bdynamic}, @option{-Bstatic},
855 @option{-dn}, @option{-dy}, @option{-call_shared}, @option{-non_shared},
856 @option{-static}, @option{-N}, @option{-n}, @option{--whole-archive},
857 @option{--no-whole-archive}, @option{-r}, @option{-Ur},
858 @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}, @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries},
859 @option{--as-needed}, @option{--no-as-needed}, and @option{-a}.
860
861 One target for this option are specifications for @file{pkg-config}. When
862 used with the @option{--libs} option all possibly needed libraries are
863 listed and then possibly linked with all the time. It is better to return
864 something as follows:
865
866 @smallexample
867 -Wl,--push-state,--as-needed -libone -libtwo -Wl,--pop-state
868 @end smallexample
869
870 @kindex --pop-state
871 @cindex pop state governing input file handling
872 @item --pop-state
873 Undoes the effect of --push-state, restores the previous values of the
874 flags governing input file handling.
875
876 @kindex -q
877 @kindex --emit-relocs
878 @cindex retain relocations in final executable
879 @item -q
880 @itemx --emit-relocs
881 Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
882 Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
883 order to perform correct modifications of executables. This results
884 in larger executables.
885
886 This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
887
888 @kindex --force-dynamic
889 @cindex forcing the creation of dynamic sections
890 @item --force-dynamic
891 Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is specific
892 to VxWorks targets.
893
894 @cindex partial link
895 @cindex relocatable output
896 @kindex -r
897 @kindex --relocatable
898 @item -r
899 @itemx --relocatable
900 Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
901 turn serve as input to @command{ld}. This is often called @dfn{partial
902 linking}. As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
903 magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
904 @code{OMAGIC}.
905 @c ; see @option{-N}.
906 If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced. When
907 linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
908 constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
909
910 When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
911 partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
912 relocations. Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
913 example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
914 with input files in other formats at all.
915
916 This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
917
918 @kindex -R @var{file}
919 @kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
920 @cindex symbol-only input
921 @item -R @var{filename}
922 @itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
923 Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
924 relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output file
925 to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
926 programs. You may use this option more than once.
927
928 For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
929 followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
930 the @option{-rpath} option.
931
932 @kindex -s
933 @kindex --strip-all
934 @cindex strip all symbols
935 @item -s
936 @itemx --strip-all
937 Omit all symbol information from the output file.
938
939 @kindex -S
940 @kindex --strip-debug
941 @cindex strip debugger symbols
942 @item -S
943 @itemx --strip-debug
944 Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
945
946 @kindex --strip-discarded
947 @kindex --no-strip-discarded
948 @item --strip-discarded
949 @itemx --no-strip-discarded
950 Omit (or do not omit) global symbols defined in discarded sections.
951 Enabled by default.
952
953 @kindex -t
954 @kindex --trace
955 @cindex input files, displaying
956 @item -t
957 @itemx --trace
958 Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them.
959
960 @kindex -T @var{script}
961 @kindex --script=@var{script}
962 @cindex script files
963 @item -T @var{scriptfile}
964 @itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
965 Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script. This script replaces
966 @command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
967 @var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
968 output file. @xref{Scripts}. If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
969 the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
970 specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options. Multiple @samp{-T}
971 options accumulate.
972
973 @kindex -dT @var{script}
974 @kindex --default-script=@var{script}
975 @cindex script files
976 @item -dT @var{scriptfile}
977 @itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
978 Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script. @xref{Scripts}.
979
980 This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
981 processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
982 command line has been processed. This allows options placed after the
983 @option{--default-script} option on the command line to affect the
984 behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the linker
985 command line cannot be directly controlled by the user. (eg because
986 the command line is being constructed by another tool, such as
987 @samp{gcc}).
988
989 @kindex -u @var{symbol}
990 @kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
991 @cindex undefined symbol
992 @item -u @var{symbol}
993 @itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
994 Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
995 symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
996 modules from standard libraries. @samp{-u} may be repeated with
997 different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. This
998 option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
999
1000 If this option is being used to force additional modules to be pulled
1001 into the link, and if it is an error for the symbol to remain
1002 undefined, then the option @option{--require-defined} should be used
1003 instead.
1004
1005 @kindex --require-defined=@var{symbol}
1006 @cindex symbols, require defined
1007 @cindex defined symbol
1008 @item --require-defined=@var{symbol}
1009 Require that @var{symbol} is defined in the output file. This option
1010 is the same as option @option{--undefined} except that if @var{symbol}
1011 is not defined in the output file then the linker will issue an error
1012 and exit. The same effect can be achieved in a linker script by using
1013 @code{EXTERN}, @code{ASSERT} and @code{DEFINED} together. This option
1014 can be used multiple times to require additional symbols.
1015
1016 @kindex -Ur
1017 @cindex constructors
1018 @item -Ur
1019 For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
1020 @samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
1021 turn serve as input to @command{ld}. When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
1022 @emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
1023 It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
1024 with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
1025 be added to. Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
1026 @samp{-r} for the others.
1027
1028 @kindex --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1029 @cindex orphan sections
1030 @cindex sections, orphan
1031 @item --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1032 Control how orphan sections are handled. An orphan section is one not
1033 specifically mentioned in a linker script. @xref{Orphan Sections}.
1034
1035 @var{MODE} can have any of the following values:
1036
1037 @table @code
1038 @item place
1039 Orphan sections are placed into a suitable output section following
1040 the strategy described in @ref{Orphan Sections}. The option
1041 @samp{--unique} also affects how sections are placed.
1042
1043 @item discard
1044 All orphan sections are discarded, by placing them in the
1045 @samp{/DISCARD/} section (@pxref{Output Section Discarding}).
1046
1047 @item warn
1048 The linker will place the orphan section as for @code{place} and also
1049 issue a warning.
1050
1051 @item error
1052 The linker will exit with an error if any orphan section is found.
1053 @end table
1054
1055 The default if @samp{--orphan-handling} is not given is @code{place}.
1056
1057 @kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1058 @item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1059 Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
1060 @var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
1061 missing, for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
1062 specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
1063 multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging of
1064 input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
1065 in a linker script.
1066
1067 @kindex -v
1068 @kindex -V
1069 @kindex --version
1070 @cindex version
1071 @item -v
1072 @itemx --version
1073 @itemx -V
1074 Display the version number for @command{ld}. The @option{-V} option also
1075 lists the supported emulations.
1076
1077 @kindex -x
1078 @kindex --discard-all
1079 @cindex deleting local symbols
1080 @item -x
1081 @itemx --discard-all
1082 Delete all local symbols.
1083
1084 @kindex -X
1085 @kindex --discard-locals
1086 @cindex local symbols, deleting
1087 @item -X
1088 @itemx --discard-locals
1089 Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
1090 system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
1091 or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.)
1092
1093 @kindex -y @var{symbol}
1094 @kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1095 @cindex symbol tracing
1096 @item -y @var{symbol}
1097 @itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1098 Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears. This
1099 option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is necessary
1100 to prepend an underscore.
1101
1102 This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
1103 don't know where the reference is coming from.
1104
1105 @kindex -Y @var{path}
1106 @item -Y @var{path}
1107 Add @var{path} to the default library search path. This option exists
1108 for Solaris compatibility.
1109
1110 @kindex -z @var{keyword}
1111 @item -z @var{keyword}
1112 The recognized keywords are:
1113 @table @samp
1114
1115 @item combreloc
1116 Combines multiple reloc sections and sorts them to make dynamic symbol
1117 lookup caching possible.
1118
1119 @item common
1120 Generate common symbols with the STT_COMMON type druing a relocatable
1121 link.
1122
1123 @item defs
1124 Disallows undefined symbols in object files. Undefined symbols in
1125 shared libraries are still allowed.
1126
1127 @item execstack
1128 Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
1129
1130 @item global
1131 This option is only meaningful when building a shared object. It makes
1132 the symbols defined by this shared object available for symbol resolution
1133 of subsequently loaded libraries.
1134
1135 @item initfirst
1136 This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
1137 It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
1138 before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
1139 the process at the same time. Similarly the runtime finalization of
1140 the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
1141 objects.
1142
1143 @item interpose
1144 Marks the object that its symbol table interposes before all symbols
1145 but the primary executable.
1146
1147 @item lazy
1148 When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1149 dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to the point when
1150 the function is called (lazy binding), rather than at load time.
1151 Lazy binding is the default.
1152
1153 @item loadfltr
1154 Marks the object that its filters be processed immediately at
1155 runtime.
1156
1157 @item muldefs
1158 Allows multiple definitions.
1159
1160 @item nocombreloc
1161 Disables multiple reloc sections combining.
1162
1163 @item nocommon
1164 Generate common symbols with the STT_OBJECT type druing a relocatable
1165 link.
1166
1167 @item nocopyreloc
1168 Disable linker generated .dynbss variables used in place of variables
1169 defined in shared libraries. May result in dynamic text relocations.
1170
1171 @item nodefaultlib
1172 Marks the object that the search for dependencies of this object will
1173 ignore any default library search paths.
1174
1175 @item nodelete
1176 Marks the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
1177
1178 @item nodlopen
1179 Marks the object not available to @code{dlopen}.
1180
1181 @item nodump
1182 Marks the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
1183
1184 @item noexecstack
1185 Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
1186
1187 @item text
1188 Treat DT_TEXTREL in shared object as error.
1189
1190 @item notext
1191 Don't treat DT_TEXTREL in shared object as error.
1192
1193 @item textoff
1194 Don't treat DT_TEXTREL in shared object as error.
1195
1196 @item norelro
1197 Don't create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1198
1199 @item now
1200 When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1201 dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
1202 when the shared library is linked to using dlopen, instead of
1203 deferring function call resolution to the point when the function is
1204 first called.
1205
1206 @item origin
1207 Marks the object may contain $ORIGIN.
1208
1209 @item relro
1210 Create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1211
1212 @item max-page-size=@var{value}
1213 Set the emulation maximum page size to @var{value}.
1214
1215 @item common-page-size=@var{value}
1216 Set the emulation common page size to @var{value}.
1217
1218 @item stack-size=@var{value}
1219 Specify a stack size for in an ELF @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment.
1220 Specifying zero will override any default non-zero sized
1221 @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment creation.
1222
1223 @item bndplt
1224 Always generate BND prefix in PLT entries. Supported for Linux/x86_64.
1225
1226 @item noextern-protected-data
1227 Don't treat protected data symbol as external when building shared
1228 library. This option overrides linker backend default. It can be used
1229 to workaround incorrect relocations against protected data symbols
1230 generated by compiler. Updates on protected data symbols by another
1231 module aren't visible to the resulting shared library. Supported for
1232 i386 and x86-64.
1233
1234 @item dynamic-undefined-weak
1235 Make undefined weak symbols dynamic when building a dynamic object,
1236 if they are referenced from a regular object file and not forced local
1237 by symbol visibility or versioning. Not all targets support this
1238 option.
1239
1240 @item nodynamic-undefined-weak
1241 Do not make undefined weak symbols dynamic when building a dynamic
1242 object. Not all targets support this option. If neither
1243 @option{-z nodynamic-undefined-weak} nor @option{-z dynamic-undefined-weak}
1244 are given, a target may default to either option being in force, or
1245 make some other selection of undefined weak symbols dynamic.
1246
1247 @item noreloc-overflow
1248 Disable relocation overflow check. This can be used to disable
1249 relocation overflow check if there will be no dynamic relocation
1250 overflow at run-time. Supported for x86_64.
1251
1252 @item call-nop=prefix-addr
1253 @itemx call-nop=suffix-nop
1254 @itemx call-nop=prefix-@var{byte}
1255 @itemx call-nop=suffix-@var{byte}
1256 Specify the 1-byte @code{NOP} padding when transforming indirect call
1257 to a locally defined function, foo, via its GOT slot.
1258 @option{call-nop=prefix-addr} generates @code{0x67 call foo}.
1259 @option{call-nop=suffix-nop} generates @code{call foo 0x90}.
1260 @option{call-nop=prefix-@var{byte}} generates @code{@var{byte} call foo}.
1261 @option{call-nop=suffix-@var{byte}} generates @code{call foo @var{byte}}.
1262 Supported for i386 and x86_64.
1263
1264 @end table
1265
1266 Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
1267
1268 @kindex -(
1269 @cindex groups of archives
1270 @item -( @var{archives} -)
1271 @itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
1272 The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files. They may be
1273 either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
1274
1275 The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
1276 references are created. Normally, an archive is searched only once in
1277 the order that it is specified on the command line. If a symbol in that
1278 archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
1279 object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
1280 would not be able to resolve that reference. By grouping the archives,
1281 they all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
1282 resolved.
1283
1284 Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best to use
1285 it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
1286 more archives.
1287
1288 @kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
1289 @kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1290 @item --accept-unknown-input-arch
1291 @itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1292 Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
1293 recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
1294 and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. This was
1295 the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14. The default
1296 behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
1297 so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
1298 restore the old behaviour.
1299
1300 @kindex --as-needed
1301 @kindex --no-as-needed
1302 @item --as-needed
1303 @itemx --no-as-needed
1304 This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries mentioned
1305 on the command line after the @option{--as-needed} option. Normally
1306 the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library mentioned
1307 on the command line, regardless of whether the library is actually
1308 needed or not. @option{--as-needed} causes a DT_NEEDED tag to only be
1309 emitted for a library that @emph{at that point in the link} satisfies a
1310 non-weak undefined symbol reference from a regular object file or, if
1311 the library is not found in the DT_NEEDED lists of other needed libraries, a
1312 non-weak undefined symbol reference from another needed dynamic library.
1313 Object files or libraries appearing on the command line @emph{after}
1314 the library in question do not affect whether the library is seen as
1315 needed. This is similar to the rules for extraction of object files
1316 from archives. @option{--no-as-needed} restores the default behaviour.
1317
1318 @kindex --add-needed
1319 @kindex --no-add-needed
1320 @item --add-needed
1321 @itemx --no-add-needed
1322 These two options have been deprecated because of the similarity of
1323 their names to the @option{--as-needed} and @option{--no-as-needed}
1324 options. They have been replaced by @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1325 and @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
1326
1327 @kindex -assert @var{keyword}
1328 @item -assert @var{keyword}
1329 This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
1330
1331 @kindex -Bdynamic
1332 @kindex -dy
1333 @kindex -call_shared
1334 @item -Bdynamic
1335 @itemx -dy
1336 @itemx -call_shared
1337 Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on platforms
1338 for which shared libraries are supported. This option is normally the
1339 default on such platforms. The different variants of this option are
1340 for compatibility with various systems. You may use this option
1341 multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
1342 @option{-l} options which follow it.
1343
1344 @kindex -Bgroup
1345 @item -Bgroup
1346 Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
1347 section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
1348 object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
1349 @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all} is implied. This option is
1350 only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
1351
1352 @kindex -Bstatic
1353 @kindex -dn
1354 @kindex -non_shared
1355 @kindex -static
1356 @item -Bstatic
1357 @itemx -dn
1358 @itemx -non_shared
1359 @itemx -static
1360 Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
1361 platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
1362 variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
1363 may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
1364 library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it. This
1365 option also implies @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all}. This
1366 option can be used with @option{-shared}. Doing so means that a
1367 shared library is being created but that all of the library's external
1368 references must be resolved by pulling in entries from static
1369 libraries.
1370
1371 @kindex -Bsymbolic
1372 @item -Bsymbolic
1373 When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
1374 definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it is possible
1375 for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
1376 within the shared library. This option can also be used with the
1377 @option{--export-dynamic} option, when creating a position independent
1378 executable, to bind references to global symbols to the definition within
1379 the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which
1380 support shared libraries and position independent executables.
1381
1382 @kindex -Bsymbolic-functions
1383 @item -Bsymbolic-functions
1384 When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
1385 symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.
1386 This option can also be used with the @option{--export-dynamic} option,
1387 when creating a position independent executable, to bind references
1388 to global function symbols to the definition within the executable.
1389 This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
1390 libraries and position independent executables.
1391
1392 @kindex --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1393 @item --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1394 Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
1395 typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
1396 global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition
1397 within the shared library, or creating dynamically linked executables
1398 to specify a list of symbols which should be added to the symbol table
1399 in the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
1400 which support shared libraries.
1401
1402 The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node without
1403 scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
1404
1405 @kindex --dynamic-list-data
1406 @item --dynamic-list-data
1407 Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
1408
1409 @kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1410 @item --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1411 Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete. It
1412 is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
1413
1414 @kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1415 @item --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1416 Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type identification.
1417
1418 @kindex --check-sections
1419 @kindex --no-check-sections
1420 @item --check-sections
1421 @itemx --no-check-sections
1422 Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
1423 been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the linker will
1424 perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
1425 suitable error messages. The linker does know about, and does make
1426 allowances for sections in overlays. The default behaviour can be
1427 restored by using the command line switch @option{--check-sections}.
1428 Section overlap is not usually checked for relocatable links. You can
1429 force checking in that case by using the @option{--check-sections}
1430 option.
1431
1432 @kindex --copy-dt-needed-entries
1433 @kindex --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1434 @item --copy-dt-needed-entries
1435 @itemx --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1436 This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries referred to
1437 by DT_NEEDED tags @emph{inside} ELF dynamic libraries mentioned on the
1438 command line. Normally the linker won't add a DT_NEEDED tag to the
1439 output binary for each library mentioned in a DT_NEEDED tag in an
1440 input dynamic library. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1441 specified on the command line however any dynamic libraries that
1442 follow it will have their DT_NEEDED entries added. The default
1443 behaviour can be restored with @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
1444
1445 This option also has an effect on the resolution of symbols in dynamic
1446 libraries. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries} dynamic libraries
1447 mentioned on the command line will be recursively searched, following
1448 their DT_NEEDED tags to other libraries, in order to resolve symbols
1449 required by the output binary. With the default setting however
1450 the searching of dynamic libraries that follow it will stop with the
1451 dynamic library itself. No DT_NEEDED links will be traversed to resolve
1452 symbols.
1453
1454 @cindex cross reference table
1455 @kindex --cref
1456 @item --cref
1457 Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
1458 generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
1459 Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
1460
1461 The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
1462 easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed out,
1463 sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is given. If the
1464 symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
1465 definition. If the symbol is defined as a common value then any files
1466 where this happens appear next. Finally any files that reference the
1467 symbol are listed.
1468
1469 @cindex common allocation
1470 @kindex --no-define-common
1471 @item --no-define-common
1472 This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
1473 The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
1474 @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1475
1476 The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
1477 the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
1478 of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
1479 forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
1480 Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
1481 from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
1482 This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
1483 and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
1484 duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
1485 paths for runtime symbol resolution.
1486
1487 @cindex group allocation in linker script
1488 @cindex section groups
1489 @cindex COMDAT
1490 @kindex --force-group-allocation
1491 @item --force-group-allocation
1492 This option causes the linker to place section group members like
1493 normal input sections, and to delete the section groups. This is the
1494 default behaviour for a final link but this option can be used to
1495 change the behaviour of a relocatable link (@samp{-r}). The script
1496 command @code{FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION} has the same
1497 effect. @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1498
1499 @cindex symbols, from command line
1500 @kindex --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{exp}
1501 @item --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{expression}
1502 Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
1503 address given by @var{expression}. You may use this option as many
1504 times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
1505 limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
1506 context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
1507 symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
1508 constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
1509 using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments}).
1510 @emph{Note:} there should be no white space between @var{symbol}, the
1511 equals sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{expression}.
1512
1513 @cindex demangling, from command line
1514 @kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
1515 @kindex --no-demangle
1516 @item --demangle[=@var{style}]
1517 @itemx --no-demangle
1518 These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
1519 and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
1520 present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
1521 underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
1522 mangled symbol names into user readable names. Different compilers have
1523 different mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used
1524 to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. The linker will
1525 demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
1526 is set. These options may be used to override the default.
1527
1528 @cindex dynamic linker, from command line
1529 @kindex -I@var{file}
1530 @kindex --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1531 @item -I@var{file}
1532 @itemx --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1533 Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
1534 generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
1535 linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
1536 doing.
1537
1538 @kindex --no-dynamic-linker
1539 @item --no-dynamic-linker
1540 When producing an executable file, omit the request for a dynamic
1541 linker to be used at load-time. This is only meaningful for ELF
1542 executables that contain dynamic relocations, and usually requires
1543 entry point code that is capable of processing these relocations.
1544
1545 @kindex --embedded-relocs
1546 @item --embedded-relocs
1547 This option is similar to the @option{--emit-relocs} option except
1548 that the relocs are stored in a target specific section. This option
1549 is only supported by the @samp{BFIN}, @samp{CR16} and @emph{M68K}
1550 targets.
1551
1552 @kindex --fatal-warnings
1553 @kindex --no-fatal-warnings
1554 @item --fatal-warnings
1555 @itemx --no-fatal-warnings
1556 Treat all warnings as errors. The default behaviour can be restored
1557 with the option @option{--no-fatal-warnings}.
1558
1559 @kindex --force-exe-suffix
1560 @item --force-exe-suffix
1561 Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
1562
1563 If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
1564 @code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
1565 the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
1566 option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
1567 Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
1568 it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
1569
1570 @kindex --gc-sections
1571 @kindex --no-gc-sections
1572 @cindex garbage collection
1573 @item --gc-sections
1574 @itemx --no-gc-sections
1575 Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored on
1576 targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour (of not
1577 performing this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
1578 @samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line. Note that garbage
1579 collection for COFF and PE format targets is supported, but the
1580 implementation is currently considered to be experimental.
1581
1582 @samp{--gc-sections} decides which input sections are used by
1583 examining symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry
1584 symbol and all sections containing symbols undefined on the
1585 command-line will be kept, as will sections containing symbols
1586 referenced by dynamic objects. Note that when building shared
1587 libraries, the linker must assume that any visible symbol is
1588 referenced. Once this initial set of sections has been determined,
1589 the linker recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
1590 relocations. See @samp{--entry} and @samp{--undefined}.
1591
1592 This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with option
1593 @samp{-r}). In this case the root of symbols kept must be explicitly
1594 specified either by an @samp{--entry} or @samp{--undefined} option or by
1595 a @code{ENTRY} command in the linker script.
1596
1597 @kindex --print-gc-sections
1598 @kindex --no-print-gc-sections
1599 @cindex garbage collection
1600 @item --print-gc-sections
1601 @itemx --no-print-gc-sections
1602 List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
1603 printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
1604 collection has been enabled via the @samp{--gc-sections}) option. The
1605 default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) can
1606 be restored by specifying @samp{--no-print-gc-sections} on the command
1607 line.
1608
1609 @kindex --gc-keep-exported
1610 @cindex garbage collection
1611 @item --gc-keep-exported
1612 When @samp{--gc-sections} is enabled, this option prevents garbage
1613 collection of unused input sections that contain global symbols having
1614 default or protected visibility. This option is intended to be used for
1615 executables where unreferenced sections would otherwise be garbage
1616 collected regardless of the external visibility of contained symbols.
1617 Note that this option has no effect when linking shared objects since
1618 it is already the default behaviour. This option is only supported for
1619 ELF format targets.
1620
1621 @kindex --print-output-format
1622 @cindex output format
1623 @item --print-output-format
1624 Print the name of the default output format (perhaps influenced by
1625 other command-line options). This is the string that would appear
1626 in an @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} linker script command (@pxref{File Commands}).
1627
1628 @kindex --print-memory-usage
1629 @cindex memory usage
1630 @item --print-memory-usage
1631 Print used size, total size and used size of memory regions created with
1632 the @ref{MEMORY} command. This is useful on embedded targets to have a
1633 quick view of amount of free memory. The format of the output has one
1634 headline and one line per region. It is both human readable and easily
1635 parsable by tools. Here is an example of an output:
1636
1637 @smallexample
1638 Memory region Used Size Region Size %age Used
1639 ROM: 256 KB 1 MB 25.00%
1640 RAM: 32 B 2 GB 0.00%
1641 @end smallexample
1642
1643 @cindex help
1644 @cindex usage
1645 @kindex --help
1646 @item --help
1647 Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
1648
1649 @kindex --target-help
1650 @item --target-help
1651 Print a summary of all target specific options on the standard output and exit.
1652
1653 @kindex -Map=@var{mapfile}
1654 @item -Map=@var{mapfile}
1655 Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}. See the description of the
1656 @option{-M} option, above.
1657
1658 @cindex memory usage
1659 @kindex --no-keep-memory
1660 @item --no-keep-memory
1661 @command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
1662 symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells @command{ld} to
1663 instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
1664 necessary. This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
1665 while linking a large executable.
1666
1667 @kindex --no-undefined
1668 @kindex -z defs
1669 @item --no-undefined
1670 @itemx -z defs
1671 Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1672 is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1673 The switch @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
1674 behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
1675 libraries being linked in.
1676
1677 @kindex --allow-multiple-definition
1678 @kindex -z muldefs
1679 @item --allow-multiple-definition
1680 @itemx -z muldefs
1681 Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1682 report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
1683 first definition will be used.
1684
1685 @kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
1686 @kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
1687 @item --allow-shlib-undefined
1688 @itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
1689 Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
1690 This switch is similar to @option{--no-undefined} except that it
1691 determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
1692 shared library rather than a regular object file. It does not affect
1693 how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1694
1695 The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
1696 referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to create
1697 an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being used to create
1698 a shared library.
1699
1700 The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
1701 libraries specified at link time are that:
1702
1703 @itemize @bullet
1704 @item
1705 A shared library specified at link time may not be the same as the one
1706 that is available at load time, so the symbol might actually be
1707 resolvable at load time.
1708 @item
1709 There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where undefined
1710 symbols in shared libraries are normal.
1711
1712 The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load time to
1713 select whichever function is most appropriate for the current
1714 architecture. This is used, for example, to dynamically select an
1715 appropriate memset function.
1716 @end itemize
1717
1718 @kindex --no-undefined-version
1719 @item --no-undefined-version
1720 Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
1721 it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
1722 will be issued instead.
1723
1724 @kindex --default-symver
1725 @item --default-symver
1726 Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1727 exported symbols.
1728
1729 @kindex --default-imported-symver
1730 @item --default-imported-symver
1731 Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1732 imported symbols.
1733
1734 @kindex --no-warn-mismatch
1735 @item --no-warn-mismatch
1736 Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
1737 files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
1738 been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
1739 This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
1740 errors. This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
1741 have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
1742 inappropriate.
1743
1744 @kindex --no-warn-search-mismatch
1745 @item --no-warn-search-mismatch
1746 Normally @command{ld} will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1747 library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
1748
1749 @kindex --no-whole-archive
1750 @item --no-whole-archive
1751 Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
1752 archive files.
1753
1754 @cindex output file after errors
1755 @kindex --noinhibit-exec
1756 @item --noinhibit-exec
1757 Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1758 Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
1759 errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
1760 when it issues any error whatsoever.
1761
1762 @kindex -nostdlib
1763 @item -nostdlib
1764 Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1765 command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
1766 (including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
1767
1768 @ifclear SingleFormat
1769 @kindex --oformat=@var{output-format}
1770 @item --oformat=@var{output-format}
1771 @command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1772 file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
1773 @samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
1774 object file. Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
1775 object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
1776 should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1777 usual format on each machine. @var{output-format} is a text string, the
1778 name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can
1779 list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.) The script
1780 command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
1781 this option overrides it. @xref{BFD}.
1782 @end ifclear
1783
1784 @kindex --out-implib
1785 @item --out-implib @var{file}
1786 Create an import library in @var{file} corresponding to the executable
1787 the linker is generating (eg. a DLL or ELF program). This import
1788 library (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a} for DLLs)
1789 may be used to link clients against the generated executable; this
1790 behaviour makes it possible to skip a separate import library creation
1791 step (eg. @code{dlltool} for DLLs). This option is only available for
1792 the i386 PE and ELF targetted ports of the linker.
1793
1794 @kindex -pie
1795 @kindex --pic-executable
1796 @item -pie
1797 @itemx --pic-executable
1798 @cindex position independent executables
1799 Create a position independent executable. This is currently only supported on
1800 ELF platforms. Position independent executables are similar to shared
1801 libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
1802 address the OS chooses for them (which can vary between invocations). Like
1803 normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
1804 defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1805
1806 @kindex -qmagic
1807 @item -qmagic
1808 This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1809
1810 @kindex -Qy
1811 @item -Qy
1812 This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1813
1814 @kindex --relax
1815 @cindex synthesizing linker
1816 @cindex relaxing addressing modes
1817 @cindex --no-relax
1818 @item --relax
1819 @itemx --no-relax
1820 An option with machine dependent effects.
1821 @ifset GENERIC
1822 This option is only supported on a few targets.
1823 @end ifset
1824 @ifset H8300
1825 @xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
1826 @end ifset
1827 @ifset I960
1828 @xref{i960,, @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family}.
1829 @end ifset
1830 @ifset XTENSA
1831 @xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
1832 @end ifset
1833 @ifset M68HC11
1834 @xref{M68HC11/68HC12,,@command{ld} and the 68HC11 and 68HC12}.
1835 @end ifset
1836 @ifset NIOSII
1837 @xref{Nios II,,@command{ld} and the Altera Nios II}.
1838 @end ifset
1839 @ifset POWERPC
1840 @xref{PowerPC ELF32,,@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support}.
1841 @end ifset
1842
1843 On some platforms the @samp{--relax} option performs target specific,
1844 global optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves
1845 addressing in the program, such as relaxing address modes,
1846 synthesizing new instructions, selecting shorter version of current
1847 instructions, and combining constant values.
1848
1849 On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
1850 debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
1851 @ifset GENERIC
1852 This is known to be the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300
1853 family of processors.
1854 @end ifset
1855
1856 @ifset GENERIC
1857 On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
1858 but ignored.
1859 @end ifset
1860
1861 On platforms where @samp{--relax} is accepted the option
1862 @samp{--no-relax} can be used to disable the feature.
1863
1864 @cindex retaining specified symbols
1865 @cindex stripping all but some symbols
1866 @cindex symbols, retaining selectively
1867 @kindex --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1868 @item --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1869 Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
1870 discarding all others. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
1871 symbol name per line. This option is especially useful in environments
1872 @ifset GENERIC
1873 (such as VxWorks)
1874 @end ifset
1875 where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
1876 run-time memory.
1877
1878 @samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
1879 or symbols needed for relocations.
1880
1881 You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
1882 line. It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
1883
1884 @ifset GENERIC
1885 @item -rpath=@var{dir}
1886 @cindex runtime library search path
1887 @kindex -rpath=@var{dir}
1888 Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used when
1889 linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All @option{-rpath}
1890 arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
1891 them to locate shared objects at runtime. The @option{-rpath} option is
1892 also used when locating shared objects which are needed by shared
1893 objects explicitly included in the link; see the description of the
1894 @option{-rpath-link} option. If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an
1895 ELF executable, the contents of the environment variable
1896 @code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it is defined.
1897
1898 The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
1899 SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search path out of all the
1900 @option{-L} options it is given. If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
1901 runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
1902 options, ignoring the @option{-L} options. This can be useful when using
1903 gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
1904 file systems.
1905
1906 For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
1907 followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
1908 the @option{-rpath} option.
1909 @end ifset
1910
1911 @ifset GENERIC
1912 @cindex link-time runtime library search path
1913 @kindex -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1914 @item -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1915 When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another. This
1916 happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
1917 of the input files.
1918
1919 When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
1920 non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
1921 shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
1922 explicitly. In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
1923 specifies the first set of directories to search. The
1924 @option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
1925 either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
1926 appearing multiple times.
1927
1928 The tokens @var{$ORIGIN} and @var{$LIB} can appear in these search
1929 directories. They will be replaced by the full path to the directory
1930 containing the program or shared object in the case of @var{$ORIGIN}
1931 and either @samp{lib} - for 32-bit binaries - or @samp{lib64} - for
1932 64-bit binaries - in the case of @var{$LIB}.
1933
1934 The alternative form of these tokens - @var{$@{ORIGIN@}} and
1935 @var{$@{LIB@}} can also be used. The token @var{$PLATFORM} is not
1936 supported.
1937
1938 This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
1939 that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
1940 is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
1941 runtime linker would do.
1942
1943 The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
1944 libraries:
1945 @enumerate
1946 @item
1947 Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
1948 @item
1949 Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options. The difference
1950 between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
1951 specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
1952 used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
1953 at link time. Searching @option{-rpath} in this way is only supported
1954 by native linkers and cross linkers which have been configured with
1955 the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
1956 @item
1957 On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the @option{-rpath} and
1958 @option{-rpath-link} options were not used, search the contents of the
1959 environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH}.
1960 @item
1961 On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
1962 directories specified using @option{-L} options.
1963 @item
1964 For a native linker, search the contents of the environment
1965 variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
1966 @item
1967 For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
1968 @code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
1969 libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
1970 @code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
1971 @item
1972 The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
1973 @item
1974 For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
1975 exists, the list of directories found in that file.
1976 @end enumerate
1977
1978 If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
1979 warning and continue with the link.
1980 @end ifset
1981
1982 @kindex -shared
1983 @kindex -Bshareable
1984 @item -shared
1985 @itemx -Bshareable
1986 @cindex shared libraries
1987 Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
1988 and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
1989 shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
1990 undefined symbols in the link.
1991
1992 @kindex --sort-common
1993 @item --sort-common
1994 @itemx --sort-common=ascending
1995 @itemx --sort-common=descending
1996 This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by alignment in
1997 ascending or descending order when it places them in the appropriate output
1998 sections. The symbol alignments considered are sixteen-byte or larger,
1999 eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and one-byte. This is to prevent gaps
2000 between symbols due to alignment constraints. If no sorting order is
2001 specified, then descending order is assumed.
2002
2003 @kindex --sort-section=name
2004 @item --sort-section=name
2005 This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_NAME} to all wildcard section
2006 patterns in the linker script.
2007
2008 @kindex --sort-section=alignment
2009 @item --sort-section=alignment
2010 This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} to all wildcard section
2011 patterns in the linker script.
2012
2013 @kindex --spare-dynamic-tags
2014 @item --spare-dynamic-tags=@var{count}
2015 This option specifies the number of empty slots to leave in the
2016 .dynamic section of ELF shared objects. Empty slots may be needed by
2017 post processing tools, such as the prelinker. The default is 5.
2018
2019 @kindex --split-by-file
2020 @item --split-by-file[=@var{size}]
2021 Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
2022 each input file when @var{size} is reached. @var{size} defaults to a
2023 size of 1 if not given.
2024
2025 @kindex --split-by-reloc
2026 @item --split-by-reloc[=@var{count}]
2027 Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
2028 output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
2029 This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
2030 certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
2031 cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section. Note
2032 that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
2033 support arbitrary sections. The linker will not split up individual
2034 input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
2035 more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
2036 many relocations. @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
2037
2038 @kindex --stats
2039 @item --stats
2040 Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
2041 as execution time and memory usage.
2042
2043 @kindex --sysroot=@var{directory}
2044 @item --sysroot=@var{directory}
2045 Use @var{directory} as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
2046 configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
2047 that were configured using @option{--with-sysroot}.
2048
2049 @kindex --task-link
2050 @item --task-link
2051 This is used by COFF/PE based targets to create a task-linked object
2052 file where all of the global symbols have been converted to statics.
2053
2054 @kindex --traditional-format
2055 @cindex traditional format
2056 @item --traditional-format
2057 For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
2058 the output of some existing linker. This switch requests @command{ld} to
2059 use the traditional format instead.
2060
2061 @cindex dbx
2062 For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
2063 symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file with
2064 full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately, the SunOS
2065 @code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
2066 trouble). The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
2067 combine duplicate entries.
2068
2069 @kindex --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
2070 @item --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
2071 Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
2072 address given by @var{org}. You may use this option as many
2073 times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
2074 line.
2075 @var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
2076 for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
2077 @samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values. @emph{Note:} there
2078 should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
2079 sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
2080
2081 @kindex -Tbss=@var{org}
2082 @kindex -Tdata=@var{org}
2083 @kindex -Ttext=@var{org}
2084 @cindex segment origins, cmd line
2085 @item -Tbss=@var{org}
2086 @itemx -Tdata=@var{org}
2087 @itemx -Ttext=@var{org}
2088 Same as @option{--section-start}, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
2089 @code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
2090
2091 @kindex -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
2092 @item -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
2093 @cindex text segment origin, cmd line
2094 When creating an ELF executable, it will set the address of the first
2095 byte of the text segment.
2096
2097 @kindex -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
2098 @item -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
2099 @cindex rodata segment origin, cmd line
2100 When creating an ELF executable or shared object for a target where
2101 the read-only data is in its own segment separate from the executable
2102 text, it will set the address of the first byte of the read-only data segment.
2103
2104 @kindex -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
2105 @item -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
2106 @cindex ldata segment origin, cmd line
2107 When creating an ELF executable or shared object for x86-64 medium memory
2108 model, it will set the address of the first byte of the ldata segment.
2109
2110 @kindex --unresolved-symbols
2111 @item --unresolved-symbols=@var{method}
2112 Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four possible
2113 values for @samp{method}:
2114
2115 @table @samp
2116 @item ignore-all
2117 Do not report any unresolved symbols.
2118
2119 @item report-all
2120 Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
2121
2122 @item ignore-in-object-files
2123 Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
2124 ignore them if they come from regular object files.
2125
2126 @item ignore-in-shared-libs
2127 Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
2128 ignore them if they come from shared libraries. This can be useful
2129 when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
2130 libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
2131 command line.
2132 @end table
2133
2134 The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
2135 by the @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} option.
2136
2137 Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
2138 unresolved symbol but the option @option{--warn-unresolved-symbols}
2139 can change this to a warning.
2140
2141 @kindex --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
2142 @cindex verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
2143 @item --dll-verbose
2144 @itemx --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
2145 Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
2146 supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. Display
2147 the linker script being used by the linker. If the optional @var{NUMBER}
2148 argument > 1, plugin symbol status will also be displayed.
2149
2150 @kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
2151 @cindex version script, symbol versions
2152 @item --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
2153 Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is typically
2154 used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
2155 about the version hierarchy for the library being created. This option
2156 is only fully supported on ELF platforms which support shared libraries;
2157 see @ref{VERSION}. It is partially supported on PE platforms, which can
2158 use version scripts to filter symbol visibility in auto-export mode: any
2159 symbols marked @samp{local} in the version script will not be exported.
2160 @xref{WIN32}.
2161
2162 @kindex --warn-common
2163 @cindex warnings, on combining symbols
2164 @cindex combining symbols, warnings on
2165 @item --warn-common
2166 Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
2167 a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practice,
2168 but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This option allows
2169 you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
2170 Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practice, so you may get some
2171 warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
2172
2173 There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
2174
2175 @table @samp
2176 @item int i = 1;
2177 A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
2178 file.
2179
2180 @item extern int i;
2181 An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
2182 There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
2183 variable somewhere.
2184
2185 @item int i;
2186 A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
2187 variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
2188 The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
2189 single symbol. If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
2190 size. The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
2191 a definition of the same variable.
2192 @end table
2193
2194 The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
2195 Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
2196 just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
2197 encountered with the same name. One or both of the two symbols will be
2198 a common symbol.
2199
2200 @enumerate
2201 @item
2202 Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
2203 definition for the symbol.
2204 @smallexample
2205 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2206 overridden by definition
2207 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
2208 @end smallexample
2209
2210 @item
2211 Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
2212 the symbol is encountered. This is the same as the previous case,
2213 except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
2214 @smallexample
2215 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
2216 overriding common
2217 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
2218 @end smallexample
2219
2220 @item
2221 Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
2222 @smallexample
2223 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
2224 of `@var{symbol}'
2225 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
2226 @end smallexample
2227
2228 @item
2229 Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
2230 @smallexample
2231 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2232 overridden by larger common
2233 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
2234 @end smallexample
2235
2236 @item
2237 Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol. This is
2238 the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
2239 encountered in a different order.
2240 @smallexample
2241 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2242 overriding smaller common
2243 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
2244 @end smallexample
2245 @end enumerate
2246
2247 @kindex --warn-constructors
2248 @item --warn-constructors
2249 Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for a few
2250 object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
2251 detect the use of global constructors.
2252
2253 @kindex --warn-multiple-gp
2254 @item --warn-multiple-gp
2255 Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
2256 This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
2257 Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
2258 section. A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
2259 of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
2260 base-register relative addressing mode. Since the offset in
2261 base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
2262 bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool. Thus, in
2263 large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
2264 values in order to be able to address all possible constants. This
2265 option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
2266
2267 @kindex --warn-once
2268 @cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
2269 @cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
2270 @item --warn-once
2271 Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
2272 which refers to it.
2273
2274 @kindex --warn-section-align
2275 @cindex warnings, on section alignment
2276 @cindex section alignment, warnings on
2277 @item --warn-section-align
2278 Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
2279 alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
2280 The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
2281 is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
2282 the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
2283
2284 @kindex --warn-shared-textrel
2285 @item --warn-shared-textrel
2286 Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
2287
2288 @kindex --warn-alternate-em
2289 @item --warn-alternate-em
2290 Warn if an object has alternate ELF machine code.
2291
2292 @kindex --warn-unresolved-symbols
2293 @item --warn-unresolved-symbols
2294 If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
2295 @option{--unresolved-symbols}) it will normally generate an error.
2296 This option makes it generate a warning instead.
2297
2298 @kindex --error-unresolved-symbols
2299 @item --error-unresolved-symbols
2300 This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
2301 it is reporting unresolved symbols.
2302
2303 @kindex --whole-archive
2304 @cindex including an entire archive
2305 @item --whole-archive
2306 For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
2307 @option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
2308 in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
2309 files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
2310 library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
2311 library. This option may be used more than once.
2312
2313 Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
2314 about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
2315 Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
2316 list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
2317 your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
2318
2319 @kindex --wrap=@var{symbol}
2320 @item --wrap=@var{symbol}
2321 Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}. Any undefined reference to
2322 @var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. Any
2323 undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
2324 @var{symbol}.
2325
2326 This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
2327 wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. If it
2328 wishes to call the system function, it should call
2329 @code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
2330
2331 Here is a trivial example:
2332
2333 @smallexample
2334 void *
2335 __wrap_malloc (size_t c)
2336 @{
2337 printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
2338 return __real_malloc (c);
2339 @}
2340 @end smallexample
2341
2342 If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
2343 all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
2344 instead. The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
2345 call the real @code{malloc} function.
2346
2347 You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
2348 links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed. If you do this,
2349 you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
2350 file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
2351 call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
2352
2353 @kindex --eh-frame-hdr
2354 @kindex --no-eh-frame-hdr
2355 @item --eh-frame-hdr
2356 @itemx --no-eh-frame-hdr
2357 Request (@option{--eh-frame-hdr}) or suppress
2358 (@option{--no-eh-frame-hdr}) the creation of @code{.eh_frame_hdr}
2359 section and ELF @code{PT_GNU_EH_FRAME} segment header.
2360
2361 @kindex --ld-generated-unwind-info
2362 @item --no-ld-generated-unwind-info
2363 Request creation of @code{.eh_frame} unwind info for linker
2364 generated code sections like PLT. This option is on by default
2365 if linker generated unwind info is supported.
2366
2367 @kindex --enable-new-dtags
2368 @kindex --disable-new-dtags
2369 @item --enable-new-dtags
2370 @itemx --disable-new-dtags
2371 This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
2372 systems may not understand them. If you specify
2373 @option{--enable-new-dtags}, the new dynamic tags will be created as needed
2374 and older dynamic tags will be omitted.
2375 If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
2376 created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
2377 those options are only available for ELF systems.
2378
2379 @kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
2380 @item --hash-size=@var{number}
2381 Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
2382 close to @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
2383 time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
2384 increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing this
2385 value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of speed.
2386
2387 @kindex --hash-style=@var{style}
2388 @item --hash-style=@var{style}
2389 Set the type of linker's hash table(s). @var{style} can be either
2390 @code{sysv} for classic ELF @code{.hash} section, @code{gnu} for
2391 new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash} section or @code{both} for both
2392 the classic ELF @code{.hash} and new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash}
2393 hash tables. The default is @code{sysv}.
2394
2395 @kindex --compress-debug-sections=none
2396 @kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2397 @kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2398 @kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
2399 @item --compress-debug-sections=none
2400 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2401 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2402 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
2403 On ELF platforms, these options control how DWARF debug sections are
2404 compressed using zlib.
2405
2406 @option{--compress-debug-sections=none} doesn't compress DWARF debug
2407 sections. @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu} compresses
2408 DWARF debug sections and renames them to begin with @samp{.zdebug}
2409 instead of @samp{.debug}. @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi}
2410 also compresses DWARF debug sections, but rather than renaming them it
2411 sets the SHF_COMPRESSED flag in the sections' headers.
2412
2413 The @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib} option is an alias for
2414 @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi}.
2415
2416 Note that this option overrides any compression in input debug
2417 sections, so if a binary is linked with @option{--compress-debug-sections=none}
2418 for example, then any compressed debug sections in input files will be
2419 uncompressed before they are copied into the output binary.
2420
2421 The default compression behaviour varies depending upon the target
2422 involved and the configure options used to build the toolchain. The
2423 default can be determined by examining the output from the linker's
2424 @option{--help} option.
2425
2426 @kindex --reduce-memory-overheads
2427 @item --reduce-memory-overheads
2428 This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the expense of
2429 linking speed. This was introduced to select the old O(n^2) algorithm
2430 for link map file generation, rather than the new O(n) algorithm which uses
2431 about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
2432
2433 Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size to
2434 1021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the linker's
2435 run time. This is not done however if the @option{--hash-size} switch
2436 has been used.
2437
2438 The @option{--reduce-memory-overheads} switch may be also be used to
2439 enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
2440
2441 @kindex --build-id
2442 @kindex --build-id=@var{style}
2443 @item --build-id
2444 @itemx --build-id=@var{style}
2445 Request the creation of a @code{.note.gnu.build-id} ELF note section
2446 or a @code{.buildid} COFF section. The contents of the note are
2447 unique bits identifying this linked file. @var{style} can be
2448 @code{uuid} to use 128 random bits, @code{sha1} to use a 160-bit
2449 @sc{SHA1} hash on the normative parts of the output contents,
2450 @code{md5} to use a 128-bit @sc{MD5} hash on the normative parts of
2451 the output contents, or @code{0x@var{hexstring}} to use a chosen bit
2452 string specified as an even number of hexadecimal digits (@code{-} and
2453 @code{:} characters between digit pairs are ignored). If @var{style}
2454 is omitted, @code{sha1} is used.
2455
2456 The @code{md5} and @code{sha1} styles produces an identifier
2457 that is always the same in an identical output file, but will be
2458 unique among all nonidentical output files. It is not intended
2459 to be compared as a checksum for the file's contents. A linked
2460 file may be changed later by other tools, but the build ID bit
2461 string identifying the original linked file does not change.
2462
2463 Passing @code{none} for @var{style} disables the setting from any
2464 @code{--build-id} options earlier on the command line.
2465 @end table
2466
2467 @c man end
2468
2469 @subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
2470
2471 @c man begin OPTIONS
2472
2473 The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
2474 the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
2475 normal executable. You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
2476 use this option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
2477 @code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
2478 like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
2479 symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
2480 object file).
2481
2482 In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
2483 support additional command line options that are specific to the i386
2484 PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their
2485 values by either a space or an equals sign.
2486
2487 @table @gcctabopt
2488
2489 @kindex --add-stdcall-alias
2490 @item --add-stdcall-alias
2491 If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
2492 as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
2493 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2494
2495 @kindex --base-file
2496 @item --base-file @var{file}
2497 Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
2498 addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
2499 @file{dlltool}.
2500 [This is an i386 PE specific option]
2501
2502 @kindex --dll
2503 @item --dll
2504 Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
2505 @option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
2506 file.
2507 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2508
2509 @kindex --enable-long-section-names
2510 @kindex --disable-long-section-names
2511 @item --enable-long-section-names
2512 @itemx --disable-long-section-names
2513 The PE variants of the COFF object format add an extension that permits
2514 the use of section names longer than eight characters, the normal limit
2515 for COFF. By default, these names are only allowed in object files, as
2516 fully-linked executable images do not carry the COFF string table required
2517 to support the longer names. As a GNU extension, it is possible to
2518 allow their use in executable images as well, or to (probably pointlessly!)
2519 disallow it in object files, by using these two options. Executable images
2520 generated with these long section names are slightly non-standard, carrying
2521 as they do a string table, and may generate confusing output when examined
2522 with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file viewers and dumpers. However,
2523 GDB relies on the use of PE long section names to find Dwarf-2 debug
2524 information sections in an executable image at runtime, and so if neither
2525 option is specified on the command-line, @command{ld} will enable long
2526 section names, overriding the default and technically correct behaviour,
2527 when it finds the presence of debug information while linking an executable
2528 image and not stripping symbols.
2529 [This option is valid for all PE targeted ports of the linker]
2530
2531 @kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
2532 @kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
2533 @item --enable-stdcall-fixup
2534 @itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
2535 If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
2536 do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
2537 only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
2538 resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example, the
2539 undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
2540 @code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
2541 to the function @code{_bar}. When the linker does this, it prints a
2542 warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
2543 import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
2544 to be usable. If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
2545 feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
2546 @option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
2547 mismatches are considered to be errors.
2548 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2549
2550 @kindex --leading-underscore
2551 @kindex --no-leading-underscore
2552 @item --leading-underscore
2553 @itemx --no-leading-underscore
2554 For most targets default symbol-prefix is an underscore and is defined
2555 in target's description. By this option it is possible to
2556 disable/enable the default underscore symbol-prefix.
2557
2558 @cindex DLLs, creating
2559 @kindex --export-all-symbols
2560 @item --export-all-symbols
2561 If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
2562 be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
2563 otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
2564 explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
2565 attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
2566 option is given. Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
2567 @code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
2568 @code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
2569 exported. Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
2570 re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
2571 such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
2572 @code{_iname}. In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
2573 @code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
2574 Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
2575 not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an
2576 extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
2577 (obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
2578 These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
2579 @code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
2580 @code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
2581 @code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
2582 @code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
2583 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2584
2585 @kindex --exclude-symbols
2586 @item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
2587 Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
2588 exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
2589 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2590
2591 @kindex --exclude-all-symbols
2592 @item --exclude-all-symbols
2593 Specifies no symbols should be automatically exported.
2594 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2595
2596 @kindex --file-alignment
2597 @item --file-alignment
2598 Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
2599 file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
2600 512.
2601 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2602
2603 @cindex heap size
2604 @kindex --heap
2605 @item --heap @var{reserve}
2606 @itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
2607 Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2608 to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1MB reserved, 4K
2609 committed.
2610 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2611
2612 @cindex image base
2613 @kindex --image-base
2614 @item --image-base @var{value}
2615 Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll. This is
2616 the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
2617 is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
2618 your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
2619 other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
2620 for dlls.
2621 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2622
2623 @kindex --kill-at
2624 @item --kill-at
2625 If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
2626 symbols before they are exported.
2627 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2628
2629 @kindex --large-address-aware
2630 @item --large-address-aware
2631 If given, the appropriate bit in the ``Characteristics'' field of the COFF
2632 header is set to indicate that this executable supports virtual addresses
2633 greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used in conjunction with the /3GB
2634 or /USERVA=@var{value} megabytes switch in the ``[operating systems]''
2635 section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit has no effect.
2636 [This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2637
2638 @kindex --disable-large-address-aware
2639 @item --disable-large-address-aware
2640 Reverts the effect of a previous @samp{--large-address-aware} option.
2641 This is useful if @samp{--large-address-aware} is always set by the compiler
2642 driver (e.g. Cygwin gcc) and the executable does not support virtual
2643 addresses greater than 2 gigabytes.
2644 [This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2645
2646 @kindex --major-image-version
2647 @item --major-image-version @var{value}
2648 Sets the major number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 1.
2649 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2650
2651 @kindex --major-os-version
2652 @item --major-os-version @var{value}
2653 Sets the major number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 4.
2654 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2655
2656 @kindex --major-subsystem-version
2657 @item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
2658 Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 4.
2659 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2660
2661 @kindex --minor-image-version
2662 @item --minor-image-version @var{value}
2663 Sets the minor number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 0.
2664 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2665
2666 @kindex --minor-os-version
2667 @item --minor-os-version @var{value}
2668 Sets the minor number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 0.
2669 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2670
2671 @kindex --minor-subsystem-version
2672 @item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
2673 Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 0.
2674 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2675
2676 @cindex DEF files, creating
2677 @cindex DLLs, creating
2678 @kindex --output-def
2679 @item --output-def @var{file}
2680 The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
2681 file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
2682 (which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
2683 library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
2684 automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
2685 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2686
2687 @cindex DLLs, creating
2688 @kindex --enable-auto-image-base
2689 @item --enable-auto-image-base
2690 @itemx --enable-auto-image-base=@var{value}
2691 Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, optionally starting with base
2692 @var{value}, unless one is specified using the @code{--image-base} argument.
2693 By using a hash generated from the dllname to create unique image bases
2694 for each DLL, in-memory collisions and relocations which can delay program
2695 execution are avoided.
2696 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2697
2698 @kindex --disable-auto-image-base
2699 @item --disable-auto-image-base
2700 Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
2701 user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
2702 default.
2703 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2704
2705 @cindex DLLs, linking to
2706 @kindex --dll-search-prefix
2707 @item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
2708 When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
2709 search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
2710 @code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behaviour allows easy distinction
2711 between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
2712 uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
2713 @code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
2714 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2715
2716 @kindex --enable-auto-import
2717 @item --enable-auto-import
2718 Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
2719 DATA imports from DLLs, and create the necessary thunking symbols when
2720 building the import libraries with those DATA exports. Note: Use of the
2721 'auto-import' extension will cause the text section of the image file
2722 to be made writable. This does not conform to the PE-COFF format
2723 specification published by Microsoft.
2724
2725 Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
2726 data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
2727 placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
2728 around a problem with consts that is described here:
2729 http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
2730
2731 Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may
2732 see this message:
2733
2734 "variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
2735 documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
2736
2737 This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
2738 ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
2739 allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
2740 fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
2741 constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL. Any
2742 multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
2743 this error condition. However, regardless of the exact data type
2744 of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
2745 the warning, and exit.
2746
2747 There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
2748 data type of the exported variable:
2749
2750 One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
2751 of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
2752 this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
2753
2754 A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
2755 that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. For arrays,
2756 there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
2757 a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable. Thus:
2758
2759 @example
2760 extern type extern_array[];
2761 extern_array[1] -->
2762 @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
2763 @end example
2764
2765 or
2766
2767 @example
2768 extern type extern_array[];
2769 extern_array[1] -->
2770 @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
2771 @end example
2772
2773 For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
2774 is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
2775
2776 @example
2777 extern struct s extern_struct;
2778 extern_struct.field -->
2779 @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
2780 @end example
2781
2782 or
2783
2784 @example
2785 extern long long extern_ll;
2786 extern_ll -->
2787 @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
2788 @end example
2789
2790 A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
2791 'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
2792 @code{__declspec(dllimport)}. However, in practice that
2793 requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
2794 building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
2795 merely building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
2796 between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
2797 constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
2798
2799 Original:
2800 @example
2801 --foo.h
2802 extern int arr[];
2803 --foo.c
2804 #include "foo.h"
2805 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2806 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2807 @}
2808 @end example
2809
2810 Solution 1:
2811 @example
2812 --foo.h
2813 extern int arr[];
2814 --foo.c
2815 #include "foo.h"
2816 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2817 /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
2818 volatile int *parr = arr;
2819 printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
2820 @}
2821 @end example
2822
2823 Solution 2:
2824 @example
2825 --foo.h
2826 /* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
2827 #if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
2828 !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
2829 #define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
2830 #else
2831 #define FOO_IMPORT
2832 #endif
2833 extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
2834 --foo.c
2835 #include "foo.h"
2836 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2837 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2838 @}
2839 @end example
2840
2841 A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
2842 library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
2843 for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
2844 functions).
2845 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2846
2847 @kindex --disable-auto-import
2848 @item --disable-auto-import
2849 Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to
2850 @code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
2851 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2852
2853 @kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2854 @item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2855 If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
2856 that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
2857 a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
2858 environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
2859 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2860
2861 @kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2862 @item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2863 Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from
2864 DLLs.
2865 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2866
2867 @kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
2868 @item --enable-extra-pe-debug
2869 Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
2870 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2871
2872 @kindex --section-alignment
2873 @item --section-alignment
2874 Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
2875 addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
2876 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2877
2878 @cindex stack size
2879 @kindex --stack
2880 @item --stack @var{reserve}
2881 @itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
2882 Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2883 to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2MB reserved, 4K
2884 committed.
2885 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2886
2887 @kindex --subsystem
2888 @item --subsystem @var{which}
2889 @itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
2890 @itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
2891 Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
2892 legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
2893 @code{console}, @code{posix}, and @code{xbox}. You may optionally set
2894 the subsystem version also. Numeric values are also accepted for
2895 @var{which}.
2896 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2897
2898 The following options set flags in the @code{DllCharacteristics} field
2899 of the PE file header:
2900 [These options are specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2901
2902 @kindex --high-entropy-va
2903 @item --high-entropy-va
2904 Image is compatible with 64-bit address space layout randomization
2905 (ASLR).
2906
2907 @kindex --dynamicbase
2908 @item --dynamicbase
2909 The image base address may be relocated using address space layout
2910 randomization (ASLR). This feature was introduced with MS Windows
2911 Vista for i386 PE targets.
2912
2913 @kindex --forceinteg
2914 @item --forceinteg
2915 Code integrity checks are enforced.
2916
2917 @kindex --nxcompat
2918 @item --nxcompat
2919 The image is compatible with the Data Execution Prevention.
2920 This feature was introduced with MS Windows XP SP2 for i386 PE targets.
2921
2922 @kindex --no-isolation
2923 @item --no-isolation
2924 Although the image understands isolation, do not isolate the image.
2925
2926 @kindex --no-seh
2927 @item --no-seh
2928 The image does not use SEH. No SE handler may be called from
2929 this image.
2930
2931 @kindex --no-bind
2932 @item --no-bind
2933 Do not bind this image.
2934
2935 @kindex --wdmdriver
2936 @item --wdmdriver
2937 The driver uses the MS Windows Driver Model.
2938
2939 @kindex --tsaware
2940 @item --tsaware
2941 The image is Terminal Server aware.
2942
2943 @kindex --insert-timestamp
2944 @item --insert-timestamp
2945 @itemx --no-insert-timestamp
2946 Insert a real timestamp into the image. This is the default behaviour
2947 as it matches legacy code and it means that the image will work with
2948 other, proprietary tools. The problem with this default is that it
2949 will result in slightly different images being produced each time the
2950 same sources are linked. The option @option{--no-insert-timestamp}
2951 can be used to insert a zero value for the timestamp, this ensuring
2952 that binaries produced from identical sources will compare
2953 identically.
2954 @end table
2955
2956 @c man end
2957
2958 @ifset C6X
2959 @subsection Options specific to C6X uClinux targets
2960
2961 @c man begin OPTIONS
2962
2963 The C6X uClinux target uses a binary format called DSBT to support shared
2964 libraries. Each shared library in the system needs to have a unique index;
2965 all executables use an index of 0.
2966
2967 @table @gcctabopt
2968
2969 @kindex --dsbt-size
2970 @item --dsbt-size @var{size}
2971 This option sets the number of entries in the DSBT of the current executable
2972 or shared library to @var{size}. The default is to create a table with 64
2973 entries.
2974
2975 @kindex --dsbt-index
2976 @item --dsbt-index @var{index}
2977 This option sets the DSBT index of the current executable or shared library
2978 to @var{index}. The default is 0, which is appropriate for generating
2979 executables. If a shared library is generated with a DSBT index of 0, the
2980 @code{R_C6000_DSBT_INDEX} relocs are copied into the output file.
2981
2982 @kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
2983 The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent
2984 exidx entries in frame unwind info.
2985
2986 @end table
2987
2988 @c man end
2989 @end ifset
2990
2991 @ifset M68HC11
2992 @subsection Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
2993
2994 @c man begin OPTIONS
2995
2996 The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
2997 memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
2998
2999 @table @gcctabopt
3000
3001 @kindex --no-trampoline
3002 @item --no-trampoline
3003 This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a trampoline
3004 is generated for each far function which is called using a @code{jsr}
3005 instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function is taken).
3006
3007 @kindex --bank-window
3008 @item --bank-window @var{name}
3009 This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region in
3010 the @samp{MEMORY} specification that describes the memory bank window.
3011 The definition of such region is then used by the linker to compute
3012 paging and addresses within the memory window.
3013
3014 @end table
3015
3016 @c man end
3017 @end ifset
3018
3019 @ifset M68K
3020 @subsection Options specific to Motorola 68K target
3021
3022 @c man begin OPTIONS
3023
3024 The following options are supported to control handling of GOT generation
3025 when linking for 68K targets.
3026
3027 @table @gcctabopt
3028
3029 @kindex --got
3030 @item --got=@var{type}
3031 This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
3032 @var{type} should be one of @samp{single}, @samp{negative},
3033 @samp{multigot} or @samp{target}. For more information refer to the
3034 Info entry for @file{ld}.
3035
3036 @end table
3037
3038 @c man end
3039 @end ifset
3040
3041 @ifset MIPS
3042 @subsection Options specific to MIPS targets
3043
3044 @c man begin OPTIONS
3045
3046 The following options are supported to control microMIPS instruction
3047 generation and branch relocation checks for ISA mode transitions when
3048 linking for MIPS targets.
3049
3050 @table @gcctabopt
3051
3052 @kindex --insn32
3053 @item --insn32
3054 @kindex --no-insn32
3055 @itemx --no-insn32
3056 These options control the choice of microMIPS instructions used in code
3057 generated by the linker, such as that in the PLT or lazy binding stubs,
3058 or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is used, then the linker only uses
3059 32-bit instruction encodings. By default or if @samp{--no-insn32} is
3060 used, all instruction encodings are used, including 16-bit ones where
3061 possible.
3062
3063 @kindex --ignore-branch-isa
3064 @item --ignore-branch-isa
3065 @kindex --no-ignore-branch-isa
3066 @itemx --no-ignore-branch-isa
3067 These options control branch relocation checks for invalid ISA mode
3068 transitions. If @samp{--ignore-branch-isa} is used, then the linker
3069 accepts any branch relocations and any ISA mode transition required
3070 is lost in relocation calculation, except for some cases of @code{BAL}
3071 instructions which meet relaxation conditions and are converted to
3072 equivalent @code{JALX} instructions as the associated relocation is
3073 calculated. By default or if @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} is used
3074 a check is made causing the loss of an ISA mode transition to produce
3075 an error.
3076
3077 @end table
3078
3079 @c man end
3080 @end ifset
3081
3082 @ifset UsesEnvVars
3083 @node Environment
3084 @section Environment Variables
3085
3086 @c man begin ENVIRONMENT
3087
3088 You can change the behaviour of @command{ld} with the environment variables
3089 @ifclear SingleFormat
3090 @code{GNUTARGET},
3091 @end ifclear
3092 @code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
3093
3094 @ifclear SingleFormat
3095 @kindex GNUTARGET
3096 @cindex default input format
3097 @code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
3098 use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}). Its value should be one
3099 of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}). If there is no
3100 @code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
3101 of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
3102 attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
3103 this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
3104 there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
3105 object-file formats is unique. However, the configuration procedure for
3106 BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
3107 in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
3108 @end ifclear
3109
3110 @kindex LDEMULATION
3111 @cindex default emulation
3112 @cindex emulation, default
3113 @code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
3114 @samp{-m} option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
3115 behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
3116 available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options. If
3117 the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
3118 variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
3119 linker was configured.
3120
3121 @kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
3122 @cindex demangling, default
3123 Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
3124 @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
3125 default to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in
3126 a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program. The default
3127 may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
3128 options.
3129
3130 @c man end
3131 @end ifset
3132
3133 @node Scripts
3134 @chapter Linker Scripts
3135
3136 @cindex scripts
3137 @cindex linker scripts
3138 @cindex command files
3139 Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}. This script is
3140 written in the linker command language.
3141
3142 The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
3143 the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
3144 the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts do nothing
3145 more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script can also
3146 direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
3147 described below.
3148
3149 The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
3150 yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
3151 linker executable. You can use the @samp{--verbose} command line option
3152 to display the default linker script. Certain command line options,
3153 such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
3154
3155 You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
3156 line option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the
3157 default linker script.
3158
3159 You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
3160 to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. @xref{Implicit
3161 Linker Scripts}.
3162
3163 @menu
3164 * Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
3165 * Script Format:: Linker Script Format
3166 * Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
3167 * Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
3168 * Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
3169 * SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
3170 * MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
3171 * PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
3172 * VERSION:: VERSION Command
3173 * Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
3174 * Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
3175 @end menu
3176
3177 @node Basic Script Concepts
3178 @section Basic Linker Script Concepts
3179 @cindex linker script concepts
3180 We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
3181 describe the linker script language.
3182
3183 The linker combines input files into a single output file. The output
3184 file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
3185 @dfn{object file format}. Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
3186 The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
3187 purposes we will also call it an object file. Each object file has,
3188 among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}. We sometimes refer to a
3189 section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
3190 in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
3191
3192 Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
3193 also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
3194 contents}. A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which means that
3195 the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
3196 A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
3197 area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
3198 loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section
3199 which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
3200 of debugging information.
3201
3202 Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
3203 first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address. This is the address
3204 the section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
3205 @dfn{LMA}, or load memory address. This is the address at which the
3206 section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
3207 same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
3208 is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
3209 (this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
3210 based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
3211 RAM address would be the VMA.
3212
3213 You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
3214 program with the @samp{-h} option.
3215
3216 Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
3217 @dfn{symbol table}. A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol
3218 has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
3219 information. If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
3220 will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
3221 static variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
3222 referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
3223
3224 You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
3225 program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
3226 option.
3227
3228 @node Script Format
3229 @section Linker Script Format
3230 @cindex linker script format
3231 Linker scripts are text files.
3232
3233 You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
3234 either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
3235 symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
3236 generally ignored.
3237
3238 Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
3239 If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
3240 otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
3241 double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
3242 file name.
3243
3244 You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
3245 @samp{/*} and @samp{*/}. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
3246 to whitespace.
3247
3248 @node Simple Example
3249 @section Simple Linker Script Example
3250 @cindex linker script example
3251 @cindex example of linker script
3252 Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
3253
3254 The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
3255 @samp{SECTIONS}. You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
3256 memory layout of the output file.
3257
3258 The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command. Here we will
3259 describe a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of
3260 code, initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
3261 @samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
3262 Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
3263 your input files.
3264
3265 For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
3266 0x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
3267 linker script which will do that:
3268 @smallexample
3269 SECTIONS
3270 @{
3271 . = 0x10000;
3272 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
3273 . = 0x8000000;
3274 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3275 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
3276 @}
3277 @end smallexample
3278
3279 You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
3280 followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
3281 descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
3282
3283 The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
3284 sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
3285 counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
3286 other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
3287 current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
3288 incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
3289 @samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
3290
3291 The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}. The colon is
3292 required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
3293 after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
3294 which should be placed into this output section. The @samp{*} is a
3295 wildcard which matches any file name. The expression @samp{*(.text)}
3296 means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
3297
3298 Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
3299 @samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
3300 @samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
3301
3302 The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
3303 the output file. The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
3304 at address @samp{0x8000000}. After the linker places the @samp{.data}
3305 output section, the value of the location counter will be
3306 @samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section. The
3307 effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
3308 immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory.
3309
3310 The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
3311 alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
3312 example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
3313 sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
3314 may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
3315 sections.
3316
3317 That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
3318
3319 @node Simple Commands
3320 @section Simple Linker Script Commands
3321 @cindex linker script simple commands
3322 In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
3323
3324 @menu
3325 * Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
3326 * File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
3327 @ifclear SingleFormat
3328 * Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
3329 @end ifclear
3330
3331 * REGION_ALIAS:: Assign alias names to memory regions
3332 * Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
3333 @end menu
3334
3335 @node Entry Point
3336 @subsection Setting the Entry Point
3337 @kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3338 @cindex start of execution
3339 @cindex first instruction
3340 @cindex entry point
3341 The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
3342 point}. You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
3343 entry point. The argument is a symbol name:
3344 @smallexample
3345 ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3346 @end smallexample
3347
3348 There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set the
3349 entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
3350 stopping when one of them succeeds:
3351 @itemize @bullet
3352 @item
3353 the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
3354 @item
3355 the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
3356 @item
3357 the value of a target specific symbol, if it is defined; For many
3358 targets this is @code{start}, but PE and BeOS based systems for example
3359 check a list of possible entry symbols, matching the first one found.
3360 @item
3361 the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
3362 @item
3363 The address @code{0}.
3364 @end itemize
3365
3366 @node File Commands
3367 @subsection Commands Dealing with Files
3368 @cindex linker script file commands
3369 Several linker script commands deal with files.
3370
3371 @table @code
3372 @item INCLUDE @var{filename}
3373 @kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
3374 @cindex including a linker script
3375 Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point. The file will
3376 be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
3377 with the @option{-L} option. You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
3378 10 levels deep.
3379
3380 You can place @code{INCLUDE} directives at the top level, in @code{MEMORY} or
3381 @code{SECTIONS} commands, or in output section descriptions.
3382
3383 @item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3384 @itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3385 @kindex INPUT(@var{files})
3386 @cindex input files in linker scripts
3387 @cindex input object files in linker scripts
3388 @cindex linker script input object files
3389 The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
3390 in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
3391
3392 For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
3393 a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
3394 then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
3395
3396 In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
3397 script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
3398
3399 In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
3400 with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
3401 located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
3402 for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}. Otherwise, the linker will try to
3403 open the file in the current directory. If it is not found, the
3404 linker will search through the archive library search path.
3405 The @dfn{sysroot prefix} can also be forced by specifying @code{=}
3406 as the first character in the filename path, or prefixing the filename
3407 path with @code{$SYSROOT}. See also the description of @samp{-L} in
3408 @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
3409
3410 If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
3411 name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command line argument
3412 @samp{-l}.
3413
3414 When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
3415 files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
3416 script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
3417
3418 @item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3419 @itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3420 @kindex GROUP(@var{files})
3421 @cindex grouping input files
3422 The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
3423 files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
3424 new undefined references are created. See the description of @samp{-(}
3425 in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
3426
3427 @item AS_NEEDED(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3428 @itemx AS_NEEDED(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3429 @kindex AS_NEEDED(@var{files})
3430 This construct can appear only inside of the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP}
3431 commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
3432 as if they appear directly in the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} commands,
3433 with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
3434 when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
3435 @option{--as-needed} option for all the files listed inside of it
3436 and restores previous @option{--as-needed} resp. @option{--no-as-needed}
3437 setting afterwards.
3438
3439 @item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3440 @kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3441 @cindex output file name in linker script
3442 The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file. Using
3443 @code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
3444 @samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
3445 Line Options}). If both are used, the command line option takes
3446 precedence.
3447
3448 You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
3449 output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
3450
3451 @item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3452 @kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3453 @cindex library search path in linker script
3454 @cindex archive search path in linker script
3455 @cindex search path in linker script
3456 The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
3457 @command{ld} looks for archive libraries. Using
3458 @code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
3459 on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both
3460 are used, then the linker will search both paths. Paths specified using
3461 the command line option are searched first.
3462
3463 @item STARTUP(@var{filename})
3464 @kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
3465 @cindex first input file
3466 The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
3467 that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
3468 though it were specified first on the command line. This may be useful
3469 when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
3470 first file.
3471 @end table
3472
3473 @ifclear SingleFormat
3474 @node Format Commands
3475 @subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
3476 A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
3477
3478 @table @code
3479 @item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3480 @itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
3481 @kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3482 @cindex output file format in linker script
3483 The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
3484 output file (@pxref{BFD}). Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
3485 exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3486 (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both are used, the command
3487 line option takes precedence.
3488
3489 You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
3490 formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command line options.
3491 This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
3492 desired endianness.
3493
3494 If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
3495 will be the first argument, @var{default}. If @samp{-EB} is used, the
3496 output format will be the second argument, @var{big}. If @samp{-EL} is
3497 used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
3498
3499 For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
3500 command:
3501 @smallexample
3502 OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
3503 @end smallexample
3504 This says that the default format for the output file is
3505 @samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command line
3506 option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
3507 format.
3508
3509 @item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3510 @kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3511 @cindex input file format in linker script
3512 The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
3513 files. It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
3514 This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3515 (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If the @code{TARGET} command
3516 is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
3517 command is also used to set the format for the output file. @xref{BFD}.
3518 @end table
3519 @end ifclear
3520
3521 @node REGION_ALIAS
3522 @subsection Assign alias names to memory regions
3523 @kindex REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3524 @cindex region alias
3525 @cindex region names
3526
3527 Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the
3528 @ref{MEMORY} command. Each name corresponds to at most one memory region.
3529
3530 @smallexample
3531 REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3532 @end smallexample
3533
3534 The @code{REGION_ALIAS} function creates an alias name @var{alias} for the
3535 memory region @var{region}. This allows a flexible mapping of output sections
3536 to memory regions. An example follows.
3537
3538 Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with various
3539 memory storage devices. All have a general purpose, volatile memory @code{RAM}
3540 that allows code execution or data storage. Some may have a read-only,
3541 non-volatile memory @code{ROM} that allows code execution and read-only data
3542 access. The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile memory @code{ROM2} with
3543 read-only data access and no code execution capability. We have four output
3544 sections:
3545
3546 @itemize @bullet
3547 @item
3548 @code{.text} program code;
3549 @item
3550 @code{.rodata} read-only data;
3551 @item
3552 @code{.data} read-write initialized data;
3553 @item
3554 @code{.bss} read-write zero initialized data.
3555 @end itemize
3556
3557 The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system independent
3558 part defining the output sections and a system dependent part mapping the
3559 output sections to the memory regions available on the system. Our embedded
3560 systems come with three different memory setups @code{A}, @code{B} and
3561 @code{C}:
3562 @multitable @columnfractions .25 .25 .25 .25
3563 @item Section @tab Variant A @tab Variant B @tab Variant C
3564 @item .text @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM
3565 @item .rodata @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM2
3566 @item .data @tab RAM @tab RAM/ROM @tab RAM/ROM2
3567 @item .bss @tab RAM @tab RAM @tab RAM
3568 @end multitable
3569 The notation @code{RAM/ROM} or @code{RAM/ROM2} means that this section is
3570 loaded into region @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} respectively. Please note that
3571 the load address of the @code{.data} section starts in all three variants at
3572 the end of the @code{.rodata} section.
3573
3574 The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows. It
3575 includes the system dependent @code{linkcmds.memory} file that describes the
3576 memory layout:
3577 @smallexample
3578 INCLUDE linkcmds.memory
3579
3580 SECTIONS
3581 @{
3582 .text :
3583 @{
3584 *(.text)
3585 @} > REGION_TEXT
3586 .rodata :
3587 @{
3588 *(.rodata)
3589 rodata_end = .;
3590 @} > REGION_RODATA
3591 .data : AT (rodata_end)
3592 @{
3593 data_start = .;
3594 *(.data)
3595 @} > REGION_DATA
3596 data_size = SIZEOF(.data);
3597 data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data);
3598 .bss :
3599 @{
3600 *(.bss)
3601 @} > REGION_BSS
3602 @}
3603 @end smallexample
3604
3605 Now we need three different @code{linkcmds.memory} files to define memory
3606 regions and alias names. The content of @code{linkcmds.memory} for the three
3607 variants @code{A}, @code{B} and @code{C}:
3608 @table @code
3609 @item A
3610 Here everything goes into the @code{RAM}.
3611 @smallexample
3612 MEMORY
3613 @{
3614 RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M
3615 @}
3616
3617 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM);
3618 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM);
3619 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3620 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3621 @end smallexample
3622 @item B
3623 Program code and read-only data go into the @code{ROM}. Read-write data goes
3624 into the @code{RAM}. An image of the initialized data is loaded into the
3625 @code{ROM} and will be copied during system start into the @code{RAM}.
3626 @smallexample
3627 MEMORY
3628 @{
3629 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M
3630 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3631 @}
3632
3633 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3634 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM);
3635 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3636 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3637 @end smallexample
3638 @item C
3639 Program code goes into the @code{ROM}. Read-only data goes into the
3640 @code{ROM2}. Read-write data goes into the @code{RAM}. An image of the
3641 initialized data is loaded into the @code{ROM2} and will be copied during
3642 system start into the @code{RAM}.
3643 @smallexample
3644 MEMORY
3645 @{
3646 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M
3647 ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3648 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M
3649 @}
3650
3651 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3652 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2);
3653 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3654 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3655 @end smallexample
3656 @end table
3657
3658 It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to copy the
3659 @code{.data} section from @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} into the @code{RAM} if
3660 necessary:
3661 @smallexample
3662 #include <string.h>
3663
3664 extern char data_start [];
3665 extern char data_size [];
3666 extern char data_load_start [];
3667
3668 void copy_data(void)
3669 @{
3670 if (data_start != data_load_start)
3671 @{
3672 memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size);
3673 @}
3674 @}
3675 @end smallexample
3676
3677 @node Miscellaneous Commands
3678 @subsection Other Linker Script Commands
3679 There are a few other linker scripts commands.
3680
3681 @table @code
3682 @item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
3683 @kindex ASSERT
3684 @cindex assertion in linker script
3685 Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
3686 with an error code, and print @var{message}.
3687
3688 Note that assertions are checked before the final stages of linking
3689 take place. This means that expressions involving symbols PROVIDEd
3690 inside section definitions will fail if the user has not set values
3691 for those symbols. The only exception to this rule is PROVIDEd
3692 symbols that just reference dot. Thus an assertion like this:
3693
3694 @smallexample
3695 .stack :
3696 @{
3697 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3698 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3699 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3700 @}
3701 @end smallexample
3702
3703 will fail if @code{__stack_size} is not defined elsewhere. Symbols
3704 PROVIDEd outside of section definitions are evaluated earlier, so they
3705 can be used inside ASSERTions. Thus:
3706
3707 @smallexample
3708 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3709 .stack :
3710 @{
3711 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3712 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3713 @}
3714 @end smallexample
3715
3716 will work.
3717
3718 @item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
3719 @kindex EXTERN
3720 @cindex undefined symbol in linker script
3721 Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
3722 symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
3723 modules from standard libraries. You may list several @var{symbol}s for
3724 each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times. This
3725 command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
3726
3727 @item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3728 @kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3729 @cindex common allocation in linker script
3730 This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
3731 to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
3732 output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
3733
3734 @item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3735 @kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3736 @cindex common allocation in linker script
3737 This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
3738 command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
3739 to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
3740
3741 @item FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION
3742 @kindex FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION
3743 @cindex group allocation in linker script
3744 @cindex section groups
3745 @cindex COMDAT
3746 This command has the same effect as the
3747 @samp{--force-group-allocation} command-line option: to make
3748 @command{ld} place section group members like normal input sections,
3749 and to delete the section groups even if a relocatable output file is
3750 specified (@samp{-r}).
3751
3752 @item INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] @var{output_section}
3753 @kindex INSERT
3754 @cindex insert user script into default script
3755 This command is typically used in a script specified by @samp{-T} to
3756 augment the default @code{SECTIONS} with, for example, overlays. It
3757 inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
3758 @var{output_section}, and also causes @samp{-T} to not override the
3759 default linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
3760 sections. @xref{Location Counter}. The insertion happens after the
3761 linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to the
3762 insertion, since @samp{-T} scripts are parsed before the default
3763 linker script, statements in the @samp{-T} script occur before the
3764 default linker script statements in the internal linker representation
3765 of the script. In particular, input section assignments will be made
3766 to @samp{-T} output sections before those in the default script. Here
3767 is an example of how a @samp{-T} script using @code{INSERT} might look:
3768
3769 @smallexample
3770 SECTIONS
3771 @{
3772 OVERLAY :
3773 @{
3774 .ov1 @{ ov1*(.text) @}
3775 .ov2 @{ ov2*(.text) @}
3776 @}
3777 @}
3778 INSERT AFTER .text;
3779 @end smallexample
3780
3781 @item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
3782 @kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
3783 @cindex cross references
3784 This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
3785 references among certain output sections.
3786
3787 In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
3788 using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
3789 will not be. Any direct references between the two sections would be
3790 errors. For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
3791 a function defined in the other section.
3792
3793 The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names. If
3794 @command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
3795 an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
3796 @code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
3797 names.
3798
3799 @item NOCROSSREFS_TO(@var{tosection} @var{fromsection} @dots{})
3800 @kindex NOCROSSREFS_TO(@var{tosection} @var{fromsections})
3801 @cindex cross references
3802 This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
3803 references to one section from a list of other sections.
3804
3805 The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command is useful when ensuring that two or more
3806 output sections are entirely independent but there are situations where
3807 a one-way dependency is needed. For example, in a multi-core application
3808 there may be shared code that can be called from each core but for safety
3809 must never call back.
3810
3811 The @code{NOCROSSREFS_TO} command takes a list of output section names.
3812 The first section can not be referenced from any of the other sections.
3813 If @command{ld} detects any references to the first section from any of
3814 the other sections, it reports an error and returns a non-zero exit
3815 status. Note that the @code{NOCROSSREFS_TO} command uses output section
3816 names, not input section names.
3817
3818 @ifclear SingleFormat
3819 @item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3820 @kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3821 @cindex machine architecture
3822 @cindex architecture
3823 Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is one
3824 of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}). You can see the
3825 architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
3826 the @samp{-f} option.
3827 @end ifclear
3828
3829 @item LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3830 @kindex LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3831 This command may be used to modify @command{ld} behavior. If
3832 @var{string} is @code{"SANE_EXPR"} then absolute symbols and numbers
3833 in a script are simply treated as numbers everywhere.
3834 @xref{Expression Section}.
3835 @end table
3836
3837 @node Assignments
3838 @section Assigning Values to Symbols
3839 @cindex assignment in scripts
3840 @cindex symbol definition, scripts
3841 @cindex variables, defining
3842 You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
3843 the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
3844
3845 @menu
3846 * Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
3847 * HIDDEN:: HIDDEN
3848 * PROVIDE:: PROVIDE
3849 * PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3850 * Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
3851 @end menu
3852
3853 @node Simple Assignments
3854 @subsection Simple Assignments
3855
3856 You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
3857
3858 @table @code
3859 @item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
3860 @itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
3861 @itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
3862 @itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
3863 @itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
3864 @itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
3865 @itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
3866 @itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
3867 @itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
3868 @end table
3869
3870 The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
3871 @var{expression}. In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
3872 defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
3873
3874 The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter. You
3875 may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command. @xref{Location Counter}.
3876
3877 The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
3878
3879 Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
3880
3881 You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
3882 statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
3883 section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
3884
3885 The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
3886 expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
3887
3888 Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
3889 assignments may be used:
3890
3891 @smallexample
3892 floating_point = 0;
3893 SECTIONS
3894 @{
3895 .text :
3896 @{
3897 *(.text)
3898 _etext = .;
3899 @}
3900 _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
3901 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3902 @}
3903 @end smallexample
3904 @noindent
3905 In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
3906 zero. The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
3907 the last @samp{.text} input section. The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
3908 defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
3909 upward to a 4 byte boundary.
3910
3911 @node HIDDEN
3912 @subsection HIDDEN
3913 @cindex HIDDEN
3914 For ELF targeted ports, define a symbol that will be hidden and won't be
3915 exported. The syntax is @code{HIDDEN(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3916
3917 Here is the example from @ref{Simple Assignments}, rewritten to use
3918 @code{HIDDEN}:
3919
3920 @smallexample
3921 HIDDEN(floating_point = 0);
3922 SECTIONS
3923 @{
3924 .text :
3925 @{
3926 *(.text)
3927 HIDDEN(_etext = .);
3928 @}
3929 HIDDEN(_bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3);
3930 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3931 @}
3932 @end smallexample
3933 @noindent
3934 In this case none of the three symbols will be visible outside this module.
3935
3936 @node PROVIDE
3937 @subsection PROVIDE
3938 @cindex PROVIDE
3939 In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
3940 only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
3941 the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
3942 @samp{etext}. However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
3943 @samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error. The
3944 @code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
3945 @samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined. The syntax is
3946 @code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3947
3948 Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
3949 @smallexample
3950 SECTIONS
3951 @{
3952 .text :
3953 @{
3954 *(.text)
3955 _etext = .;
3956 PROVIDE(etext = .);
3957 @}
3958 @}
3959 @end smallexample
3960
3961 In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
3962 underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
3963 the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
3964 underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
3965 If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
3966 linker will use the definition in the linker script.
3967
3968 @node PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3969 @subsection PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3970 @cindex PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3971 Similar to @code{PROVIDE}. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
3972 hidden and won't be exported.
3973
3974 @node Source Code Reference
3975 @subsection Source Code Reference
3976
3977 Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
3978 intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to
3979 a variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a
3980 symbol that does not have a value.
3981
3982 Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
3983 transform names in the source code into different names when they are
3984 stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
3985 prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive @samp{name
3986 mangling}. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name
3987 of a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
3988 variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a
3989 linker script variable might be referred to as:
3990
3991 @smallexample
3992 extern int foo;
3993 @end smallexample
3994
3995 But in the linker script it might be defined as:
3996
3997 @smallexample
3998 _foo = 1000;
3999 @end smallexample
4000
4001 In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
4002 transformation has taken place.
4003
4004 When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
4005 things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space
4006 in the program's memory to hold the @emph{value} of the symbol. The
4007 second is that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol
4008 table which holds the symbol's @emph{address}. ie the symbol table
4009 contains the address of the block of memory holding the symbol's
4010 value. So for example the following C declaration, at file scope:
4011
4012 @smallexample
4013 int foo = 1000;
4014 @end smallexample
4015
4016 creates an entry called @samp{foo} in the symbol table. This entry
4017 holds the address of an @samp{int} sized block of memory where the
4018 number 1000 is initially stored.
4019
4020 When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
4021 first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
4022 memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
4023 So:
4024
4025 @smallexample
4026 foo = 1;
4027 @end smallexample
4028
4029 looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets the address
4030 associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
4031 address. Whereas:
4032
4033 @smallexample
4034 int * a = & foo;
4035 @end smallexample
4036
4037 looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets its address
4038 and then copies this address into the block of memory associated with
4039 the variable @samp{a}.
4040
4041 Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
4042 the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are
4043 an address without a value. So for example the linker script definition:
4044
4045 @smallexample
4046 foo = 1000;
4047 @end smallexample
4048
4049 creates an entry in the symbol table called @samp{foo} which holds
4050 the address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
4051 address 1000. This means that you cannot access the @emph{value} of a
4052 linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
4053 access the @emph{address} of a linker script defined symbol.
4054
4055 Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source code
4056 you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt to
4057 use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the contents of a
4058 section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
4059 linker script contains these declarations:
4060
4061 @smallexample
4062 @group
4063 start_of_ROM = .ROM;
4064 end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM);
4065 start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
4066 @end group
4067 @end smallexample
4068
4069 Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
4070
4071 @smallexample
4072 @group
4073 extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
4074
4075 memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
4076 @end group
4077 @end smallexample
4078
4079 Note the use of the @samp{&} operators. These are correct.
4080 Alternatively the symbols can be treated as the names of vectors or
4081 arrays and then the code will again work as expected:
4082
4083 @smallexample
4084 @group
4085 extern char start_of_ROM[], end_of_ROM[], start_of_FLASH[];
4086
4087 memcpy (start_of_FLASH, start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM - start_of_ROM);
4088 @end group
4089 @end smallexample
4090
4091 Note how using this method does not require the use of @samp{&}
4092 operators.
4093
4094 @node SECTIONS
4095 @section SECTIONS Command
4096 @kindex SECTIONS
4097 The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
4098 into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
4099
4100 The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
4101 @smallexample
4102 SECTIONS
4103 @{
4104 @var{sections-command}
4105 @var{sections-command}
4106 @dots{}
4107 @}
4108 @end smallexample
4109
4110 Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
4111
4112 @itemize @bullet
4113 @item
4114 an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
4115 @item
4116 a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
4117 @item
4118 an output section description
4119 @item
4120 an overlay description
4121 @end itemize
4122
4123 The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
4124 @code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
4125 those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
4126 understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
4127 the layout of the output file.
4128
4129 Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
4130 below.
4131
4132 If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
4133 linker will place each input section into an identically named output
4134 section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
4135 input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
4136 example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
4137 in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
4138
4139 @menu
4140 * Output Section Description:: Output section description
4141 * Output Section Name:: Output section name
4142 * Output Section Address:: Output section address
4143 * Input Section:: Input section description
4144 * Output Section Data:: Output section data
4145 * Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
4146 * Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
4147 * Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
4148 * Overlay Description:: Overlay description
4149 @end menu
4150
4151 @node Output Section Description
4152 @subsection Output Section Description
4153 The full description of an output section looks like this:
4154 @smallexample
4155 @group
4156 @var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
4157 [AT(@var{lma})]
4158 [ALIGN(@var{section_align}) | ALIGN_WITH_INPUT]
4159 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4160 [@var{constraint}]
4161 @{
4162 @var{output-section-command}
4163 @var{output-section-command}
4164 @dots{}
4165 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}] [,]
4166 @end group
4167 @end smallexample
4168
4169 Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
4170
4171 The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
4172 name is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required.
4173 The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fillexp} is used and
4174 the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
4175 The line breaks and other white space are optional.
4176
4177 Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
4178
4179 @itemize @bullet
4180 @item
4181 a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
4182 @item
4183 an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
4184 @item
4185 data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
4186 @item
4187 a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
4188 @end itemize
4189
4190 @node Output Section Name
4191 @subsection Output Section Name
4192 @cindex name, section
4193 @cindex section name
4194 The name of the output section is @var{section}. @var{section} must
4195 meet the constraints of your output format. In formats which only
4196 support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
4197 must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
4198 example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
4199 output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
4200 names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
4201 quoted numeric string. A section name may consist of any sequence of
4202 characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
4203 commas must be quoted.
4204
4205 The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
4206 Discarding}.
4207
4208 @node Output Section Address
4209 @subsection Output Section Address
4210 @cindex address, section
4211 @cindex section address
4212 The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
4213 address) of the output section. This address is optional, but if it
4214 is provided then the output address will be set exactly as specified.
4215
4216 If the output address is not specified then one will be chosen for the
4217 section, based on the heuristic below. This address will be adjusted
4218 to fit the alignment requirement of the output section. The
4219 alignment requirement is the strictest alignment of any input section
4220 contained within the output section.
4221
4222 The output section address heuristic is as follows:
4223
4224 @itemize @bullet
4225 @item
4226 If an output memory @var{region} is set for the section then it
4227 is added to this region and its address will be the next free address
4228 in that region.
4229
4230 @item
4231 If the MEMORY command has been used to create a list of memory
4232 regions then the first region which has attributes compatible with the
4233 section is selected to contain it. The section's output address will
4234 be the next free address in that region; @ref{MEMORY}.
4235
4236 @item
4237 If no memory regions were specified, or none match the section then
4238 the output address will be based on the current value of the location
4239 counter.
4240 @end itemize
4241
4242 @noindent
4243 For example:
4244
4245 @smallexample
4246 .text . : @{ *(.text) @}
4247 @end smallexample
4248
4249 @noindent
4250 and
4251
4252 @smallexample
4253 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4254 @end smallexample
4255
4256 @noindent
4257 are subtly different. The first will set the address of the
4258 @samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
4259 counter. The second will set it to the current value of the location
4260 counter aligned to the strictest alignment of any of the @samp{.text}
4261 input sections.
4262
4263 The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
4264 For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
4265 so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
4266 do something like this:
4267 @smallexample
4268 .text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
4269 @end smallexample
4270 @noindent
4271 This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
4272 aligned upward to the specified value.
4273
4274 Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
4275 location counter, provided that the section is non-empty. (Empty
4276 sections are ignored).
4277
4278 @node Input Section
4279 @subsection Input Section Description
4280 @cindex input sections
4281 @cindex mapping input sections to output sections
4282 The most common output section command is an input section description.
4283
4284 The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
4285 You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
4286 in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
4287 map the input files into your memory layout.
4288
4289 @menu
4290 * Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
4291 * Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
4292 * Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
4293 * Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
4294 * Input Section Example:: Input section example
4295 @end menu
4296
4297 @node Input Section Basics
4298 @subsubsection Input Section Basics
4299 @cindex input section basics
4300 An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
4301 by a list of section names in parentheses.
4302
4303 The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
4304 describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
4305
4306 The most common input section description is to include all input
4307 sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
4308 include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
4309 @smallexample
4310 *(.text)
4311 @end smallexample
4312 @noindent
4313 Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude a list
4314 @cindex EXCLUDE_FILE
4315 of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
4316 match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list. For
4317 example:
4318 @smallexample
4319 EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) *(.ctors)
4320 @end smallexample
4321 @noindent
4322 will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o}
4323 and @file{otherfile.o} to be included. The EXCLUDE_FILE can also be
4324 placed inside the section list, for example:
4325 @smallexample
4326 *(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
4327 @end smallexample
4328 @noindent
4329 The result of this is identically to the previous example. Supporting
4330 two syntaxes for EXCLUDE_FILE is useful if the section list contains
4331 more than one section, as described below.
4332
4333 There are two ways to include more than one section:
4334 @smallexample
4335 *(.text .rdata)
4336 *(.text) *(.rdata)
4337 @end smallexample
4338 @noindent
4339 The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
4340 @samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section. In the
4341 first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
4342 they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all
4343 @samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
4344 @samp{.rdata} input sections.
4345
4346 When using EXCLUDE_FILE with more than one section, if the exclusion
4347 is within the section list then the exclusion only applies to the
4348 immediately following section, for example:
4349 @smallexample
4350 *(EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .text .rdata)
4351 @end smallexample
4352 @noindent
4353 will cause all @samp{.text} sections from all files except
4354 @file{somefile.o} to be included, while all @samp{.rdata} sections
4355 from all files, including @file{somefile.o}, will be included. To
4356 exclude the @samp{.rdata} sections from @file{somefile.o} the example
4357 could be modified to:
4358 @smallexample
4359 *(EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .text EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .rdata)
4360 @end smallexample
4361 @noindent
4362 Alternatively, placing the EXCLUDE_FILE outside of the section list,
4363 before the input file selection, will cause the exclusion to apply for
4364 all sections. Thus the previous example can be rewritten as:
4365 @smallexample
4366 EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) *(.text .rdata)
4367 @end smallexample
4368
4369 You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
4370 You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
4371 needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
4372 @smallexample
4373 data.o(.data)
4374 @end smallexample
4375
4376 To refine the sections that are included based on the section flags
4377 of an input section, INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS may be used.
4378
4379 Here is a simple example for using Section header flags for ELF sections:
4380
4381 @smallexample
4382 @group
4383 SECTIONS @{
4384 .text : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (SHF_MERGE & SHF_STRINGS) *(.text) @}
4385 .text2 : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (!SHF_WRITE) *(.text) @}
4386 @}
4387 @end group
4388 @end smallexample
4389
4390 In this example, the output section @samp{.text} will be comprised of any
4391 input section matching the name *(.text) whose section header flags
4392 @code{SHF_MERGE} and @code{SHF_STRINGS} are set. The output section
4393 @samp{.text2} will be comprised of any input section matching the name *(.text)
4394 whose section header flag @code{SHF_WRITE} is clear.
4395
4396 You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
4397 matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file,
4398 with no whitespace around the colon.
4399
4400 @table @samp
4401 @item archive:file
4402 matches file within archive
4403 @item archive:
4404 matches the whole archive
4405 @item :file
4406 matches file but not one in an archive
4407 @end table
4408
4409 Either one or both of @samp{archive} and @samp{file} can contain shell
4410 wildcards. On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
4411 single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so
4412 @samp{c:myfile.o} is a simple file specification, not @samp{myfile.o}
4413 within an archive called @samp{c}. @samp{archive:file} filespecs may
4414 also be used within an @code{EXCLUDE_FILE} list, but may not appear in
4415 other linker script contexts. For instance, you cannot extract a file
4416 from an archive by using @samp{archive:file} in an @code{INPUT}
4417 command.
4418
4419 If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
4420 the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
4421 commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
4422 @smallexample
4423 data.o
4424 @end smallexample
4425
4426 When you use a file name which is not an @samp{archive:file} specifier
4427 and does not contain any wild card
4428 characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
4429 name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. If you
4430 did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
4431 though it appeared on the command line. Note that this differs from an
4432 @code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
4433 the archive search path.
4434
4435 @node Input Section Wildcards
4436 @subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
4437 @cindex input section wildcards
4438 @cindex wildcard file name patterns
4439 @cindex file name wildcard patterns
4440 @cindex section name wildcard patterns
4441 In an input section description, either the file name or the section
4442 name or both may be wildcard patterns.
4443
4444 The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
4445 pattern for the file name.
4446
4447 The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
4448
4449 @table @samp
4450 @item *
4451 matches any number of characters
4452 @item ?
4453 matches any single character
4454 @item [@var{chars}]
4455 matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
4456 character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
4457 @samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
4458 @item \
4459 quotes the following character
4460 @end table
4461
4462 When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
4463 will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
4464 Unix). A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
4465 exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
4466 @samp{/} or not. In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
4467 a @samp{/} character.
4468
4469 File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
4470 specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. The linker
4471 does not search directories to expand wildcards.
4472
4473 If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
4474 appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
4475 will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
4476 sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
4477 @file{data.o} rule will not be used:
4478 @smallexample
4479 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4480 .data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
4481 @end smallexample
4482
4483 @cindex SORT_BY_NAME
4484 Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
4485 in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can change
4486 this by using the @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
4487 pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)}). When the
4488 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
4489 into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
4490
4491 @cindex SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT
4492 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4493 difference is @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} will sort sections into
4494 descending order by alignment before placing them in the output file.
4495 Larger alignments are placed before smaller alignments in order to
4496 reduce the amount of padding necessary.
4497
4498 @cindex SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY
4499 @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4500 difference is @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} will sort sections into
4501 ascending order by numerical value of the GCC init_priority attribute
4502 encoded in the section name before placing them in the output file.
4503
4504 @cindex SORT
4505 @code{SORT} is an alias for @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
4506
4507 When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, there
4508 can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
4509
4510 @enumerate
4511 @item
4512 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4513 It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if two
4514 sections have the same name.
4515 @item
4516 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4517 It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if two
4518 sections have the same alignment.
4519 @item
4520 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)) is
4521 treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern).
4522 @item
4523 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern))
4524 is treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern).
4525 @item
4526 All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
4527 @end enumerate
4528
4529 When both command line section sorting option and linker script
4530 section sorting command are used, section sorting command always
4531 takes precedence over the command line option.
4532
4533 If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
4534 command line option will make the section sorting command to be
4535 treated as nested sorting command.
4536
4537 @enumerate
4538 @item
4539 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern ) with
4540 @option{--sort-sections alignment} is equivalent to
4541 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4542 @item
4543 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern) with
4544 @option{--sort-section name} is equivalent to
4545 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4546 @end enumerate
4547
4548 If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
4549 command line option will be ignored.
4550
4551 @cindex SORT_NONE
4552 @code{SORT_NONE} disables section sorting by ignoring the command line
4553 section sorting option.
4554
4555 If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
4556 @samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
4557 precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
4558
4559 This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
4560 files. This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
4561 sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
4562 The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
4563 with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
4564 linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
4565 @smallexample
4566 @group
4567 SECTIONS @{
4568 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4569 .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
4570 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4571 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
4572 @}
4573 @end group
4574 @end smallexample
4575
4576 @node Input Section Common
4577 @subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
4578 @cindex common symbol placement
4579 @cindex uninitialized data placement
4580 A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
4581 file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
4582 linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
4583 named @samp{COMMON}.
4584
4585 You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
4586 other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
4587 particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
4588 input files are placed in another section.
4589
4590 In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
4591 @samp{.bss} section in the output file. For example:
4592 @smallexample
4593 .bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
4594 @end smallexample
4595
4596 @cindex scommon section
4597 @cindex small common symbols
4598 Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol. For
4599 example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
4600 symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will use a
4601 different special section name for other types of common symbols. In
4602 the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
4603 symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols. This permits you
4604 to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
4605 locations.
4606
4607 @cindex [COMMON]
4608 You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts. This
4609 notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to
4610 @samp{*(COMMON)}.
4611
4612 @node Input Section Keep
4613 @subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
4614 @cindex KEEP
4615 @cindex garbage collection
4616 When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
4617 it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
4618 This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
4619 with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
4620 @code{KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))}.
4621
4622 @node Input Section Example
4623 @subsubsection Input Section Example
4624 The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
4625 to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
4626 start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
4627 @samp{0x10000}. All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
4628 follows immediately, in the same output section. All of section
4629 @samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
4630 @samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
4631 All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
4632 files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
4633
4634 @smallexample
4635 @group
4636 SECTIONS @{
4637 outputa 0x10000 :
4638 @{
4639 all.o
4640 foo.o (.input1)
4641 @}
4642 @end group
4643 @group
4644 outputb :
4645 @{
4646 foo.o (.input2)
4647 foo1.o (.input1)
4648 @}
4649 @end group
4650 @group
4651 outputc :
4652 @{
4653 *(.input1)
4654 *(.input2)
4655 @}
4656 @}
4657 @end group
4658 @end smallexample
4659
4660 @node Output Section Data
4661 @subsection Output Section Data
4662 @cindex data
4663 @cindex section data
4664 @cindex output section data
4665 @kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
4666 @kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
4667 @kindex LONG(@var{expression})
4668 @kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
4669 @kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
4670 You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
4671 @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
4672 an output section command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in
4673 parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}). The
4674 value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
4675 counter.
4676
4677 The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
4678 store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the
4679 bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
4680 stored.
4681
4682 For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
4683 of the symbol @samp{addr}:
4684 @smallexample
4685 BYTE(1)
4686 LONG(addr)
4687 @end smallexample
4688
4689 When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
4690 same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and
4691 target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case
4692 @code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
4693 @code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
4694
4695 If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
4696 which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
4697 When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
4698 true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
4699 endianness of the first input object file.
4700
4701 Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
4702 between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
4703 @smallexample
4704 SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4705 @end smallexample
4706 whereas this will work:
4707 @smallexample
4708 SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4709 @end smallexample
4710
4711 @kindex FILL(@var{expression})
4712 @cindex holes, filling
4713 @cindex unspecified memory
4714 You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
4715 current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
4716 otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
4717 gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
4718 with the value of the expression, repeated as
4719 necessary. A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
4720 point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
4721 than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
4722 different parts of an output section.
4723
4724 This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
4725 value @samp{0x90}:
4726 @smallexample
4727 FILL(0x90909090)
4728 @end smallexample
4729
4730 The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
4731 section attribute, but it only affects the
4732 part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
4733 entire section. If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
4734 precedence. @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
4735 expression.
4736
4737 @node Output Section Keywords
4738 @subsection Output Section Keywords
4739 There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
4740 commands.
4741
4742 @table @code
4743 @kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4744 @cindex input filename symbols
4745 @cindex filename symbols
4746 @item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4747 The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
4748 The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
4749 file. The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
4750 the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
4751
4752 This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
4753 normally used for any other object file format.
4754
4755 @kindex CONSTRUCTORS
4756 @cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
4757 @cindex constructors, arranging in link
4758 @item CONSTRUCTORS
4759 When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
4760 unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
4761 destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
4762 arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
4763 automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
4764 For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
4765 linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
4766 @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears. The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
4767 ignored for other object file formats.
4768
4769 The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
4770 constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_END__}} marks the end.
4771 Similarly, @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST__}} and @w{@code{__DTOR_END__}} mark
4772 the start and end of the global destructors. The
4773 first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
4774 of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word. The
4775 compiler must arrange to actually run the code. For these object file
4776 formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
4777 @code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
4778 the startup code for @code{main}. @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
4779 destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
4780 @code{exit}.
4781
4782 For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
4783 arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
4784 addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
4785 and @code{.dtors} sections. Placing the following sequence into your
4786 linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
4787 runtime code expects to see.
4788
4789 @smallexample
4790 __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
4791 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4792 *(.ctors)
4793 LONG(0)
4794 __CTOR_END__ = .;
4795 __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
4796 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4797 *(.dtors)
4798 LONG(0)
4799 __DTOR_END__ = .;
4800 @end smallexample
4801
4802 If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
4803 which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
4804 are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
4805 are executed in the correct order. When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
4806 command, use @samp{SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead. When using the
4807 @code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))} and
4808 @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
4809 @samp{*(.dtors)}.
4810
4811 Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
4812 and you will not need to concern yourself with them. However, you may
4813 need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
4814 scripts.
4815
4816 @end table
4817
4818 @node Output Section Discarding
4819 @subsection Output Section Discarding
4820 @cindex discarding sections
4821 @cindex sections, discarding
4822 @cindex removing sections
4823 The linker will not normally create output sections with no contents.
4824 This is for convenience when referring to input sections that may or
4825 may not be present in any of the input files. For example:
4826 @smallexample
4827 .foo : @{ *(.foo) @}
4828 @end smallexample
4829 @noindent
4830 will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
4831 @samp{.foo} section in at least one input file, and if the input
4832 sections are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate
4833 space in an output section will also create the output section. So
4834 too will assignments to dot even if the assignment does not create
4835 space, except for @samp{. = 0}, @samp{. = . + 0}, @samp{. = sym},
4836 @samp{. = . + sym} and @samp{. = ALIGN (. != 0, expr, 1)} when
4837 @samp{sym} is an absolute symbol of value 0 defined in the script.
4838 This allows you to force output of an empty section with @samp{. = .}.
4839
4840 The linker will ignore address assignments (@pxref{Output Section Address})
4841 on discarded output sections, except when the linker script defines
4842 symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will obey
4843 the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
4844 section is discarded.
4845
4846 @cindex /DISCARD/
4847 The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
4848 input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
4849 section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
4850
4851 @node Output Section Attributes
4852 @subsection Output Section Attributes
4853 @cindex output section attributes
4854 We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
4855 like this:
4856
4857 @smallexample
4858 @group
4859 @var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
4860 [AT(@var{lma})]
4861 [ALIGN(@var{section_align})]
4862 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4863 [@var{constraint}]
4864 @{
4865 @var{output-section-command}
4866 @var{output-section-command}
4867 @dots{}
4868 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
4869 @end group
4870 @end smallexample
4871
4872 We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
4873 @var{output-section-command}. In this section we will describe the
4874 remaining section attributes.
4875
4876 @menu
4877 * Output Section Type:: Output section type
4878 * Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
4879 * Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
4880 * Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
4881 * Output Section Constraint:: Output section constraint
4882 * Output Section Region:: Output section region
4883 * Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
4884 * Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
4885 @end menu
4886
4887 @node Output Section Type
4888 @subsubsection Output Section Type
4889 Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
4890 parentheses. The following types are defined:
4891
4892 @table @code
4893 @item NOLOAD
4894 The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
4895 loaded into memory when the program is run.
4896 @item DSECT
4897 @itemx COPY
4898 @itemx INFO
4899 @itemx OVERLAY
4900 These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
4901 rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
4902 marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
4903 section when the program is run.
4904 @end table
4905
4906 @kindex NOLOAD
4907 @cindex prevent unnecessary loading
4908 @cindex loading, preventing
4909 The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
4910 the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
4911 the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the
4912 @samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
4913 need to be loaded when the program is run.
4914 @smallexample
4915 @group
4916 SECTIONS @{
4917 ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
4918 @dots{}
4919 @}
4920 @end group
4921 @end smallexample
4922
4923 @node Output Section LMA
4924 @subsubsection Output Section LMA
4925 @kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
4926 @kindex AT(@var{lma})
4927 @cindex load address
4928 @cindex section load address
4929 Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
4930 @ref{Basic Script Concepts}. The virtual address is specified by the
4931 @pxref{Output Section Address} described earlier. The load address is
4932 specified by the @code{AT} or @code{AT>} keywords. Specifying a load
4933 address is optional.
4934
4935 The @code{AT} keyword takes an expression as an argument. This
4936 specifies the exact load address of the section. The @code{AT>} keyword
4937 takes the name of a memory region as an argument. @xref{MEMORY}. The
4938 load address of the section is set to the next free address in the
4939 region, aligned to the section's alignment requirements.
4940
4941 If neither @code{AT} nor @code{AT>} is specified for an allocatable
4942 section, the linker will use the following heuristic to determine the
4943 load address:
4944
4945 @itemize @bullet
4946 @item
4947 If the section has a specific VMA address, then this is used as
4948 the LMA address as well.
4949
4950 @item
4951 If the section is not allocatable then its LMA is set to its VMA.
4952
4953 @item
4954 Otherwise if a memory region can be found that is compatible
4955 with the current section, and this region contains at least one
4956 section, then the LMA is set so the difference between the
4957 VMA and LMA is the same as the difference between the VMA and LMA of
4958 the last section in the located region.
4959
4960 @item
4961 If no memory regions have been declared then a default region
4962 that covers the entire address space is used in the previous step.
4963
4964 @item
4965 If no suitable region could be found, or there was no previous
4966 section then the LMA is set equal to the VMA.
4967 @end itemize
4968
4969 @cindex ROM initialized data
4970 @cindex initialized data in ROM
4971 This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
4972 example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
4973 called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
4974 @samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
4975 even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
4976 uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}. The symbol @code{_data} is
4977 defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
4978 counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
4979
4980 @smallexample
4981 @group
4982 SECTIONS
4983 @{
4984 .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
4985 .mdata 0x2000 :
4986 AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
4987 @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; @}
4988 .bss 0x3000 :
4989 @{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
4990 @}
4991 @end group
4992 @end smallexample
4993
4994 The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
4995 this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
4996 the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address. Notice
4997 how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
4998 script.
4999
5000 @smallexample
5001 @group
5002 extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
5003 char *src = &_etext;
5004 char *dst = &_data;
5005
5006 /* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
5007 while (dst < &_edata)
5008 *dst++ = *src++;
5009
5010 /* Zero bss. */
5011 for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
5012 *dst = 0;
5013 @end group
5014 @end smallexample
5015
5016 @node Forced Output Alignment
5017 @subsubsection Forced Output Alignment
5018 @kindex ALIGN(@var{section_align})
5019 @cindex forcing output section alignment
5020 @cindex output section alignment
5021 You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN. As an
5022 alternative you can enforce that the difference between the VMA and LMA remains
5023 intact throughout this output section with the ALIGN_WITH_INPUT attribute.
5024
5025 @node Forced Input Alignment
5026 @subsubsection Forced Input Alignment
5027 @kindex SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})
5028 @cindex forcing input section alignment
5029 @cindex input section alignment
5030 You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
5031 SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
5032 sections, whether larger or smaller.
5033
5034 @node Output Section Constraint
5035 @subsubsection Output Section Constraint
5036 @kindex ONLY_IF_RO
5037 @kindex ONLY_IF_RW
5038 @cindex constraints on output sections
5039 You can specify that an output section should only be created if all
5040 of its input sections are read-only or all of its input sections are
5041 read-write by using the keyword @code{ONLY_IF_RO} and
5042 @code{ONLY_IF_RW} respectively.
5043
5044 @node Output Section Region
5045 @subsubsection Output Section Region
5046 @kindex >@var{region}
5047 @cindex section, assigning to memory region
5048 @cindex memory regions and sections
5049 You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
5050 using @samp{>@var{region}}. @xref{MEMORY}.
5051
5052 Here is a simple example:
5053 @smallexample
5054 @group
5055 MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
5056 SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
5057 @end group
5058 @end smallexample
5059
5060 @node Output Section Phdr
5061 @subsubsection Output Section Phdr
5062 @kindex :@var{phdr}
5063 @cindex section, assigning to program header
5064 @cindex program headers and sections
5065 You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
5066 using @samp{:@var{phdr}}. @xref{PHDRS}. If a section is assigned to
5067 one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
5068 assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
5069 @code{:@var{phdr}} modifier. You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
5070 linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
5071
5072 Here is a simple example:
5073 @smallexample
5074 @group
5075 PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
5076 SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
5077 @end group
5078 @end smallexample
5079
5080 @node Output Section Fill
5081 @subsubsection Output Section Fill
5082 @kindex =@var{fillexp}
5083 @cindex section fill pattern
5084 @cindex fill pattern, entire section
5085 You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
5086 @samp{=@var{fillexp}}. @var{fillexp} is an expression
5087 (@pxref{Expressions}). Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
5088 within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
5089 alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
5090 necessary. If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
5091 of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
5092 an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
5093 fill pattern; Leading zeros become part of the pattern too. For all
5094 other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
5095 pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
5096 expression. In all cases, the number is big-endian.
5097
5098 You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
5099 output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
5100
5101 Here is a simple example:
5102 @smallexample
5103 @group
5104 SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
5105 @end group
5106 @end smallexample
5107
5108 @node Overlay Description
5109 @subsection Overlay Description
5110 @kindex OVERLAY
5111 @cindex overlays
5112 An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
5113 are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
5114 the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
5115 copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
5116 required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
5117 can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
5118 than another.
5119
5120 Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command. The
5121 @code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
5122 output section description. The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
5123 command is as follows:
5124 @smallexample
5125 @group
5126 OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
5127 @{
5128 @var{secname1}
5129 @{
5130 @var{output-section-command}
5131 @var{output-section-command}
5132 @dots{}
5133 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
5134 @var{secname2}
5135 @{
5136 @var{output-section-command}
5137 @var{output-section-command}
5138 @dots{}
5139 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
5140 @dots{}
5141 @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}] [,]
5142 @end group
5143 @end smallexample
5144
5145 Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
5146 section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above). The
5147 section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
5148 those within the general @code{SECTIONS} construct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
5149 except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
5150 sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
5151
5152 The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fill} is used and
5153 the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
5154
5155 The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The load
5156 addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
5157 memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
5158 whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
5159 and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
5160 and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
5161
5162 If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there are any
5163 references among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since
5164 the sections all run at the same address, it normally does not make
5165 sense for one section to refer directly to another.
5166 @xref{Miscellaneous Commands, NOCROSSREFS}.
5167
5168 For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
5169 provides two symbols. The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
5170 defined as the starting load address of the section. The symbol
5171 @code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
5172 the section. Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
5173 within C identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these
5174 symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
5175
5176 At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
5177 the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
5178
5179 Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
5180 @code{SECTIONS} construct.
5181 @smallexample
5182 @group
5183 OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
5184 @{
5185 .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
5186 .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
5187 @}
5188 @end group
5189 @end smallexample
5190 @noindent
5191 This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
5192 address 0x1000. @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
5193 @samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}. The
5194 following symbols will be defined if referenced: @code{__load_start_text0},
5195 @code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
5196 @code{__load_stop_text1}.
5197
5198 C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
5199 like the following.
5200
5201 @smallexample
5202 @group
5203 extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
5204 memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
5205 &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
5206 @end group
5207 @end smallexample
5208
5209 Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
5210 everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
5211 example could have been written identically as follows.
5212
5213 @smallexample
5214 @group
5215 .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
5216 PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
5217 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
5218 .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
5219 PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
5220 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
5221 . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
5222 @end group
5223 @end smallexample
5224
5225 @node MEMORY
5226 @section MEMORY Command
5227 @kindex MEMORY
5228 @cindex memory regions
5229 @cindex regions of memory
5230 @cindex allocating memory
5231 @cindex discontinuous memory
5232 The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
5233 memory. You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
5234
5235 The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
5236 memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
5237 may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
5238 can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
5239 set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
5240 regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
5241 around to fit into the available regions.
5242
5243 A linker script may contain many uses of the @code{MEMORY} command,
5244 however, all memory blocks defined are treated as if they were
5245 specified inside a single @code{MEMORY} command. The syntax for
5246 @code{MEMORY} is:
5247 @smallexample
5248 @group
5249 MEMORY
5250 @{
5251 @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
5252 @dots{}
5253 @}
5254 @end group
5255 @end smallexample
5256
5257 The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
5258 region. The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
5259 Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5260 with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region
5261 must have a distinct name within the @code{MEMORY} command. However you can
5262 add later alias names to existing memory regions with the @ref{REGION_ALIAS}
5263 command.
5264
5265 @cindex memory region attributes
5266 The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
5267 whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
5268 not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in
5269 @ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
5270 section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
5271 the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
5272 them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
5273
5274 The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
5275 @table @samp
5276 @item R
5277 Read-only section
5278 @item W
5279 Read/write section
5280 @item X
5281 Executable section
5282 @item A
5283 Allocatable section
5284 @item I
5285 Initialized section
5286 @item L
5287 Same as @samp{I}
5288 @item !
5289 Invert the sense of any of the attributes that follow
5290 @end table
5291
5292 If a unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
5293 @samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region. The @samp{!}
5294 attribute reverses this test, so that an unmapped section will be placed
5295 in the memory region only if it does not match any of the listed
5296 attributes.
5297
5298 @kindex ORIGIN =
5299 @kindex o =
5300 @kindex org =
5301 The @var{origin} is an numerical expression for the start address of
5302 the memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
5303 cannot involve any symbols. The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be
5304 abbreviated to @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example,
5305 @code{ORG}).
5306
5307 @kindex LENGTH =
5308 @kindex len =
5309 @kindex l =
5310 The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
5311 region. As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
5312 be numerical only and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword
5313 @code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
5314
5315 In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
5316 available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
5317 and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes. The
5318 linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
5319 is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
5320 or executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
5321 explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
5322 region.
5323
5324 @smallexample
5325 @group
5326 MEMORY
5327 @{
5328 rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
5329 ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
5330 @}
5331 @end group
5332 @end smallexample
5333
5334 Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
5335 specific output sections into that memory region by using the
5336 @samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute. For example, if you have
5337 a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
5338 output section definition. @xref{Output Section Region}. If no address
5339 was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
5340 the next available address within the memory region. If the combined
5341 output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
5342 region, the linker will issue an error message.
5343
5344 It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
5345 expression via the @code{ORIGIN(@var{memory})} and
5346 @code{LENGTH(@var{memory})} functions:
5347
5348 @smallexample
5349 @group
5350 _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
5351 @end group
5352 @end smallexample
5353
5354 @node PHDRS
5355 @section PHDRS Command
5356 @kindex PHDRS
5357 @cindex program headers
5358 @cindex ELF program headers
5359 @cindex program segments
5360 @cindex segments, ELF
5361 The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
5362 @dfn{segments}. The program headers describe how the program should be
5363 loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
5364 program with the @samp{-p} option.
5365
5366 When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
5367 reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
5368 program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
5369 This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
5370 interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
5371
5372 The linker will create reasonable program headers by default. However,
5373 in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
5374 precisely. You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose. When
5375 the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
5376 not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
5377
5378 The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
5379 generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
5380 ignore @code{PHDRS}.
5381
5382 This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command. The words @code{PHDRS},
5383 @code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
5384
5385 @smallexample
5386 @group
5387 PHDRS
5388 @{
5389 @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
5390 [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
5391 @}
5392 @end group
5393 @end smallexample
5394
5395 The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
5396 of the linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program
5397 header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5398 with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header
5399 must have a distinct name. The headers are processed in order and it
5400 is usual for them to map to sections in ascending load address order.
5401
5402 Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
5403 system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
5404 specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
5405 sections in the segments. You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
5406 attribute to place a section in a particular segment. @xref{Output
5407 Section Phdr}.
5408
5409 It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
5410 merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
5411 repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
5412 contain the section.
5413
5414 If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
5415 then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
5416 not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments. This is for
5417 convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
5418 placed in a single segment. You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
5419 default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
5420 segment at all.
5421
5422 @kindex FILEHDR
5423 @kindex PHDRS
5424 You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords after
5425 the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
5426 The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
5427 file header. The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
5428 include the ELF program headers themselves. If applied to a loadable
5429 segment (@code{PT_LOAD}), all prior loadable segments must have one of
5430 these keywords.
5431
5432 The @var{type} may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
5433 value of the keyword.
5434
5435 @table @asis
5436 @item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
5437 Indicates an unused program header.
5438
5439 @item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
5440 Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
5441 the file.
5442
5443 @item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
5444 Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
5445
5446 @item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
5447 Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
5448 found.
5449
5450 @item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
5451 Indicates a segment holding note information.
5452
5453 @item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
5454 A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
5455 ABI.
5456
5457 @item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
5458 Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
5459
5460 @item @code{PT_TLS} (7)
5461 Indicates a segment containing thread local storage.
5462
5463 @item @var{expression}
5464 An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This may
5465 be used for types not defined above.
5466 @end table
5467
5468 You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
5469 in memory by using an @code{AT} expression. This is identical to the
5470 @code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
5471 Section LMA}). The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
5472 output section attribute.
5473
5474 The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
5475 which comprise the segment. You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
5476 explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of @var{flags} must be
5477 an integer. It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
5478 header.
5479
5480 Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}. This shows a typical set of program
5481 headers used on a native ELF system.
5482
5483 @example
5484 @group
5485 PHDRS
5486 @{
5487 headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
5488 interp PT_INTERP ;
5489 text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
5490 data PT_LOAD ;
5491 dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
5492 @}
5493
5494 SECTIONS
5495 @{
5496 . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
5497 .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
5498 .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
5499 .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
5500 @dots{}
5501 . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
5502 .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
5503 .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
5504 @dots{}
5505 @}
5506 @end group
5507 @end example
5508
5509 @node VERSION
5510 @section VERSION Command
5511 @kindex VERSION @{script text@}
5512 @cindex symbol versions
5513 @cindex version script
5514 @cindex versions of symbols
5515 The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
5516 only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
5517 symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
5518 a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
5519 shared library.
5520
5521 You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
5522 you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You can
5523 also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
5524
5525 The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
5526 @smallexample
5527 VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
5528 @end smallexample
5529
5530 The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
5531 Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
5532 version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
5533 version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
5534 version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
5535 scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
5536 library.
5537
5538 The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
5539 examples.
5540
5541 @smallexample
5542 VERS_1.1 @{
5543 global:
5544 foo1;
5545 local:
5546 old*;
5547 original*;
5548 new*;
5549 @};
5550
5551 VERS_1.2 @{
5552 foo2;
5553 @} VERS_1.1;
5554
5555 VERS_2.0 @{
5556 bar1; bar2;
5557 extern "C++" @{
5558 ns::*;
5559 "f(int, double)";
5560 @};
5561 @} VERS_1.2;
5562 @end smallexample
5563
5564 This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
5565 version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
5566 The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}. It reduces
5567 a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
5568 of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
5569 symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
5570 is matched. The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
5571 in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
5572 However, if you specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the
5573 name is treated as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
5574
5575 Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}. This node
5576 depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}. The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
5577 to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
5578
5579 Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}. This node
5580 depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}. The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
5581 and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
5582
5583 When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
5584 specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
5585 unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
5586 unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
5587 somewhere in the version script. Note that it's slightly crazy to use
5588 wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node. Global
5589 wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
5590 set exported for an old version. That's wrong since older versions
5591 ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
5592
5593 The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
5594 they might suggest to the person reading them. The @samp{2.0} version
5595 could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
5596 However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
5597
5598 Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node
5599 in the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
5600 symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
5601 won't.
5602
5603 @smallexample
5604 @{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
5605 @end smallexample
5606
5607 When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
5608 symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
5609 requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
5610 shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
5611 loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
5612 linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
5613 application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
5614 way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
5615 all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
5616 search for each symbol reference.
5617
5618 The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
5619 doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
5620 that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
5621 functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
5622 the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
5623 required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
5624 that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
5625 versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
5626 the libraries being used with the application are too old.
5627
5628 There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
5629 first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
5630 source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
5631 script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
5632 maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
5633 @smallexample
5634 __asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5635 @end smallexample
5636 @noindent
5637 in the C source file. This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
5638 be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
5639 The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
5640 @samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
5641 takes precedence over a version script.
5642
5643 The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
5644 function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
5645 an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
5646 version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
5647 linked against the old interface to continue to function.
5648
5649 To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
5650 source file. Here is an example:
5651
5652 @smallexample
5653 __asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
5654 __asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5655 __asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
5656 __asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
5657 @end smallexample
5658
5659 In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
5660 unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains this
5661 example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
5662 @samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
5663
5664 When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
5665 some way to specify a default version to which external references to
5666 this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the
5667 @samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive. You can only
5668 declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
5669 you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
5670
5671 If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
5672 within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
5673 (i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
5674 specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
5675
5676 You can also specify the language in the version script:
5677
5678 @smallexample
5679 VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
5680 @end smallexample
5681
5682 The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
5683 The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
5684 demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
5685 patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}. The default
5686 @samp{lang} is @samp{C}.
5687
5688 Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
5689 described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
5690 or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In
5691 the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
5692 whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
5693 cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler
5694 might change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you
5695 should check that all of your version directives are behaving as you
5696 expect when you upgrade.
5697
5698 @node Expressions
5699 @section Expressions in Linker Scripts
5700 @cindex expressions
5701 @cindex arithmetic
5702 The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
5703 that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
5704 expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
5705 host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
5706
5707 You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
5708
5709 The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
5710 expressions.
5711
5712 @menu
5713 * Constants:: Constants
5714 * Symbolic Constants:: Symbolic constants
5715 * Symbols:: Symbol Names
5716 * Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
5717 * Location Counter:: The Location Counter
5718 * Operators:: Operators
5719 * Evaluation:: Evaluation
5720 * Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
5721 * Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
5722 @end menu
5723
5724 @node Constants
5725 @subsection Constants
5726 @cindex integer notation
5727 @cindex constants in linker scripts
5728 All constants are integers.
5729
5730 As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
5731 octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
5732 hexadecimal. Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of @samp{h} or
5733 @samp{H} for hexadecimal, @samp{o} or @samp{O} for octal, @samp{b} or
5734 @samp{B} for binary and @samp{d} or @samp{D} for decimal. Any integer
5735 value without a prefix or a suffix is considered to be decimal.
5736
5737 @cindex scaled integers
5738 @cindex K and M integer suffixes
5739 @cindex M and K integer suffixes
5740 @cindex suffixes for integers
5741 @cindex integer suffixes
5742 In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
5743 constant by
5744 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5745 @ifnottex
5746 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5747 @code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
5748 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5749 @end ifnottex
5750 @tex
5751 ${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
5752 @end tex
5753 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5754 respectively. For example, the following
5755 all refer to the same quantity:
5756
5757 @smallexample
5758 _fourk_1 = 4K;
5759 _fourk_2 = 4096;
5760 _fourk_3 = 0x1000;
5761 _fourk_4 = 10000o;
5762 @end smallexample
5763
5764 Note - the @code{K} and @code{M} suffixes cannot be used in
5765 conjunction with the base suffixes mentioned above.
5766
5767 @node Symbolic Constants
5768 @subsection Symbolic Constants
5769 @cindex symbolic constants
5770 @kindex CONSTANT
5771 It is possible to refer to target specific constants via the use of
5772 the @code{CONSTANT(@var{name})} operator, where @var{name} is one of:
5773
5774 @table @code
5775 @item MAXPAGESIZE
5776 @kindex MAXPAGESIZE
5777 The target's maximum page size.
5778
5779 @item COMMONPAGESIZE
5780 @kindex COMMONPAGESIZE
5781 The target's default page size.
5782 @end table
5783
5784 So for example:
5785
5786 @smallexample
5787 .text ALIGN (CONSTANT (MAXPAGESIZE)) : @{ *(.text) @}
5788 @end smallexample
5789
5790 will create a text section aligned to the largest page boundary
5791 supported by the target.
5792
5793 @node Symbols
5794 @subsection Symbol Names
5795 @cindex symbol names
5796 @cindex names
5797 @cindex quoted symbol names
5798 @kindex "
5799 Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
5800 and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
5801 Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
5802 specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
5803 keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
5804 @smallexample
5805 "SECTION" = 9;
5806 "with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
5807 @end smallexample
5808
5809 Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
5810 to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
5811 whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
5812
5813 @node Orphan Sections
5814 @subsection Orphan Sections
5815 @cindex orphan
5816 Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which
5817 are not explicitly placed into the output file by the linker
5818 script. The linker will still copy these sections into the
5819 output file by either finding, or creating a suitable output section
5820 in which to place the orphaned input section.
5821
5822 If the name of an orphaned input section exactly matches the name of
5823 an existing output section, then the orphaned input section will be
5824 placed at the end of that output section.
5825
5826 If there is no output section with a matching name then new output
5827 sections will be created. Each new output section will have the same
5828 name as the orphan section placed within it. If there are multiple
5829 orphan sections with the same name, these will all be combined into
5830 one new output section.
5831
5832 If new output sections are created to hold orphaned input sections,
5833 then the linker must decide where to place these new output sections
5834 in relation to existing output sections. On most modern targets, the
5835 linker attempts to place orphan sections after sections of the same
5836 attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc. If no
5837 sections with matching attributes are found, or your target lacks this
5838 support, the orphan section is placed at the end of the file.
5839
5840 The command line options @samp{--orphan-handling} and @samp{--unique}
5841 (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}) can be used to control which
5842 output sections an orphan is placed in.
5843
5844 If an orphaned section's name is representable as a C identifier then
5845 the linker will automatically @pxref{PROVIDE} two symbols:
5846 __start_SECNAME and __stop_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the
5847 section. These indicate the start address and end address of the
5848 orphaned section respectively. Note: most section names are not
5849 representable as C identifiers because they contain a @samp{.}
5850 character.
5851
5852 @node Location Counter
5853 @subsection The Location Counter
5854 @kindex .
5855 @cindex dot
5856 @cindex location counter
5857 @cindex current output location
5858 The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
5859 current output location counter. Since the @code{.} always refers to a
5860 location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
5861 within a @code{SECTIONS} command. The @code{.} symbol may appear
5862 anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
5863
5864 @cindex holes
5865 Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
5866 moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
5867 location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
5868 and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so
5869 doing creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
5870
5871 @smallexample
5872 SECTIONS
5873 @{
5874 output :
5875 @{
5876 file1(.text)
5877 . = . + 1000;
5878 file2(.text)
5879 . += 1000;
5880 file3(.text)
5881 @} = 0x12345678;
5882 @}
5883 @end smallexample
5884 @noindent
5885 In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
5886 located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}. It is
5887 followed by a 1000 byte gap. Then the @samp{.text} section from
5888 @file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
5889 @samp{.text} section from @file{file3}. The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
5890 specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
5891
5892 @cindex dot inside sections
5893 Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
5894 current containing object. Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
5895 statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
5896 absolute address. If @code{.} is used inside a section description
5897 however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
5898 not an absolute address. Thus in a script like this:
5899
5900 @smallexample
5901 SECTIONS
5902 @{
5903 . = 0x100
5904 .text: @{
5905 *(.text)
5906 . = 0x200
5907 @}
5908 . = 0x500
5909 .data: @{
5910 *(.data)
5911 . += 0x600
5912 @}
5913 @}
5914 @end smallexample
5915
5916 The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
5917 and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
5918 the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area. (If there is too
5919 much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
5920 move @code{.} backwards). The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
5921 and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
5922 the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
5923 the @samp{.data} output section itself.
5924
5925 @cindex dot outside sections
5926 Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
5927 output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
5928 needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
5929
5930 @smallexample
5931 SECTIONS
5932 @{
5933 start_of_text = . ;
5934 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5935 end_of_text = . ;
5936
5937 start_of_data = . ;
5938 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5939 end_of_data = . ;
5940 @}
5941 @end smallexample
5942
5943 If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. @code{.rodata},
5944 not mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section
5945 between @code{.text} and @code{.data}. You might think the linker
5946 should place @code{.rodata} on the blank line in the above script, but
5947 blank lines are of no particular significance to the linker. As well,
5948 the linker doesn't associate the above symbol names with their
5949 sections. Instead, it assumes that all assignments or other
5950 statements belong to the previous output section, except for the
5951 special case of an assignment to @code{.}. I.e., the linker will
5952 place the orphan @code{.rodata} section as if the script was written
5953 as follows:
5954
5955 @smallexample
5956 SECTIONS
5957 @{
5958 start_of_text = . ;
5959 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5960 end_of_text = . ;
5961
5962 start_of_data = . ;
5963 .rodata: @{ *(.rodata) @}
5964 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5965 end_of_data = . ;
5966 @}
5967 @end smallexample
5968
5969 This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
5970 @code{start_of_data}. One way to influence the orphan section
5971 placement is to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker
5972 assumes that an assignment to @code{.} is setting the start address of
5973 a following output section and thus should be grouped with that
5974 section. So you could write:
5975
5976 @smallexample
5977 SECTIONS
5978 @{
5979 start_of_text = . ;
5980 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5981 end_of_text = . ;
5982
5983 . = . ;
5984 start_of_data = . ;
5985 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5986 end_of_data = . ;
5987 @}
5988 @end smallexample
5989
5990 Now, the orphan @code{.rodata} section will be placed between
5991 @code{end_of_text} and @code{start_of_data}.
5992
5993 @need 2000
5994 @node Operators
5995 @subsection Operators
5996 @cindex operators for arithmetic
5997 @cindex arithmetic operators
5998 @cindex precedence in expressions
5999 The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
6000 the standard bindings and precedence levels:
6001 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6002 @ifnottex
6003 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6004 @smallexample
6005 precedence associativity Operators Notes
6006 (highest)
6007 1 left ! - ~ (1)
6008 2 left * / %
6009 3 left + -
6010 4 left >> <<
6011 5 left == != > < <= >=
6012 6 left &
6013 7 left |
6014 8 left &&
6015 9 left ||
6016 10 right ? :
6017 11 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
6018 (lowest)
6019 @end smallexample
6020 Notes:
6021 (1) Prefix operators
6022 (2) @xref{Assignments}.
6023 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6024 @end ifnottex
6025 @tex
6026 \vskip \baselineskip
6027 %"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
6028 \hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
6029 \hrule
6030 \halign
6031 {\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
6032 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6033 &Precedence&& Associativity &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
6034 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6035 \noalign{\hrule}
6036 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6037 &highest&&&&&\cr
6038 % '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
6039 &1&&left&&\qquad- \char'176\ !\qquad\dag&\cr
6040 &2&&left&&* / \%&\cr
6041 &3&&left&&+ -&\cr
6042 &4&&left&&>> <<&\cr
6043 &5&&left&&== != > < <= >=&\cr
6044 &6&&left&&\&&\cr
6045 &7&&left&&|&\cr
6046 &8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
6047 &9&&left&&||&\cr
6048 &10&&right&&? :&\cr
6049 &11&&right&&\qquad\&= += -= *= /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
6050 &lowest&&&&&\cr
6051 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
6052 \hrule}
6053 @end tex
6054 @iftex
6055 {
6056 @obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
6057 @dag@quad Prefix operators.
6058 @ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
6059 }
6060 @end iftex
6061 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6062
6063 @node Evaluation
6064 @subsection Evaluation
6065 @cindex lazy evaluation
6066 @cindex expression evaluation order
6067 The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
6068 an expression when absolutely necessary.
6069
6070 The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
6071 address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
6072 regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
6073 as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
6074
6075 However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
6076 until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
6077 other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
6078 for use in the symbol assignment expression.
6079
6080 The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
6081 assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
6082 allocation.
6083
6084 Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
6085 @samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
6086
6087 If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
6088 available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
6089 following
6090 @smallexample
6091 @group
6092 SECTIONS
6093 @{
6094 .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
6095 @{ *(.text) @}
6096 @}
6097 @end group
6098 @end smallexample
6099 @noindent
6100 will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
6101 address}.
6102
6103 @node Expression Section
6104 @subsection The Section of an Expression
6105 @cindex expression sections
6106 @cindex absolute expressions
6107 @cindex relative expressions
6108 @cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
6109 @cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
6110 @cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
6111 Addresses and symbols may be section relative, or absolute. A section
6112 relative symbol is relocatable. If you request relocatable output
6113 using the @samp{-r} option, a further link operation may change the
6114 value of a section relative symbol. On the other hand, an absolute
6115 symbol will retain the same value throughout any further link
6116 operations.
6117
6118 Some terms in linker expressions are addresses. This is true of
6119 section relative symbols and for builtin functions that return an
6120 address, such as @code{ADDR}, @code{LOADADDR}, @code{ORIGIN} and
6121 @code{SEGMENT_START}. Other terms are simply numbers, or are builtin
6122 functions that return a non-address value, such as @code{LENGTH}.
6123 One complication is that unless you set @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")}
6124 (@pxref{Miscellaneous Commands}), numbers and absolute symbols are treated
6125 differently depending on their location, for compatibility with older
6126 versions of @code{ld}. Expressions appearing outside an output
6127 section definition treat all numbers as absolute addresses.
6128 Expressions appearing inside an output section definition treat
6129 absolute symbols as numbers. If @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} is
6130 given, then absolute symbols and numbers are simply treated as numbers
6131 everywhere.
6132
6133 In the following simple example,
6134
6135 @smallexample
6136 @group
6137 SECTIONS
6138 @{
6139 . = 0x100;
6140 __executable_start = 0x100;
6141 .data :
6142 @{
6143 . = 0x10;
6144 __data_start = 0x10;
6145 *(.data)
6146 @}
6147 @dots{}
6148 @}
6149 @end group
6150 @end smallexample
6151
6152 both @code{.} and @code{__executable_start} are set to the absolute
6153 address 0x100 in the first two assignments, then both @code{.} and
6154 @code{__data_start} are set to 0x10 relative to the @code{.data}
6155 section in the second two assignments.
6156
6157 For expressions involving numbers, relative addresses and absolute
6158 addresses, ld follows these rules to evaluate terms:
6159
6160 @itemize @bullet
6161 @item
6162 Unary operations on an absolute address or number, and binary
6163 operations on two absolute addresses or two numbers, or between one
6164 absolute address and a number, apply the operator to the value(s).
6165 @item
6166 Unary operations on a relative address, and binary operations on two
6167 relative addresses in the same section or between one relative address
6168 and a number, apply the operator to the offset part of the address(es).
6169 @item
6170 Other binary operations, that is, between two relative addresses not
6171 in the same section, or between a relative address and an absolute
6172 address, first convert any non-absolute term to an absolute address
6173 before applying the operator.
6174 @end itemize
6175
6176 The result section of each sub-expression is as follows:
6177
6178 @itemize @bullet
6179 @item
6180 An operation involving only numbers results in a number.
6181 @item
6182 The result of comparisons, @samp{&&} and @samp{||} is also a number.
6183 @item
6184 The result of other binary arithmetic and logical operations on two
6185 relative addresses in the same section or two absolute addresses
6186 (after above conversions) is also a number when
6187 @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} or inside an output section definition
6188 but an absolute address otherwise.
6189 @item
6190 The result of other operations on relative addresses or one
6191 relative address and a number, is a relative address in the same
6192 section as the relative operand(s).
6193 @item
6194 The result of other operations on absolute addresses (after above
6195 conversions) is an absolute address.
6196 @end itemize
6197
6198 You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
6199 to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
6200 create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
6201 section @samp{.data}:
6202 @smallexample
6203 SECTIONS
6204 @{
6205 .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
6206 @}
6207 @end smallexample
6208 @noindent
6209 If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
6210 @samp{.data} section.
6211
6212 Using @code{LOADADDR} also forces an expression absolute, since this
6213 particular builtin function returns an absolute address.
6214
6215 @node Builtin Functions
6216 @subsection Builtin Functions
6217 @cindex functions in expressions
6218 The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
6219 use in linker script expressions.
6220
6221 @table @code
6222 @item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
6223 @kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
6224 @cindex expression, absolute
6225 Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
6226 of the expression @var{exp}. Primarily useful to assign an absolute
6227 value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
6228 normally section relative. @xref{Expression Section}.
6229
6230 @item ADDR(@var{section})
6231 @kindex ADDR(@var{section})
6232 @cindex section address in expression
6233 Return the address (VMA) of the named @var{section}. Your
6234 script must previously have defined the location of that section. In
6235 the following example, @code{start_of_output_1}, @code{symbol_1} and
6236 @code{symbol_2} are assigned equivalent values, except that
6237 @code{symbol_1} will be relative to the @code{.output1} section while
6238 the other two will be absolute:
6239 @smallexample
6240 @group
6241 SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6242 .output1 :
6243 @{
6244 start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
6245 @dots{}
6246 @}
6247 .output :
6248 @{
6249 symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
6250 symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
6251 @}
6252 @dots{} @}
6253 @end group
6254 @end smallexample
6255
6256 @item ALIGN(@var{align})
6257 @itemx ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
6258 @kindex ALIGN(@var{align})
6259 @kindex ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
6260 @cindex round up location counter
6261 @cindex align location counter
6262 @cindex round up expression
6263 @cindex align expression
6264 Return the location counter (@code{.}) or arbitrary expression aligned
6265 to the next @var{align} boundary. The single operand @code{ALIGN}
6266 doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just does
6267 arithmetic on it. The two operand @code{ALIGN} allows an arbitrary
6268 expression to be aligned upwards (@code{ALIGN(@var{align})} is
6269 equivalent to @code{ALIGN(ABSOLUTE(.), @var{align})}).
6270
6271 Here is an example which aligns the output @code{.data} section to the
6272 next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
6273 variable within the section to the next @code{0x8000} boundary after the
6274 input sections:
6275 @smallexample
6276 @group
6277 SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6278 .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
6279 *(.data)
6280 variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
6281 @}
6282 @dots{} @}
6283 @end group
6284 @end smallexample
6285 @noindent
6286 The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
6287 a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
6288 a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}). The second use
6289 of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
6290
6291 The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
6292
6293 @item ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6294 @kindex ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6295 @cindex section alignment
6296 Return the alignment in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6297 been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6298 evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6299 the alignment of the @code{.output} section is stored as the first
6300 value in that section.
6301 @smallexample
6302 @group
6303 SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6304 .output @{
6305 LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
6306 @dots{}
6307 @}
6308 @dots{} @}
6309 @end group
6310 @end smallexample
6311
6312 @item BLOCK(@var{exp})
6313 @kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
6314 This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
6315 scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
6316 section.
6317
6318 @item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6319 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6320 This is equivalent to either
6321 @smallexample
6322 (ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
6323 @end smallexample
6324 or
6325 @smallexample
6326 (ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize})
6327 + ((. + @var{commonpagesize} - 1) & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
6328 @end smallexample
6329 @noindent
6330 depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
6331 for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
6332 @code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
6333 If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
6334 memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
6335 bytes in the on-disk file.
6336
6337 This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
6338 any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
6339 @var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
6340 be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for (while still
6341 working on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}).
6342
6343 @noindent
6344 Example:
6345 @smallexample
6346 . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
6347 @end smallexample
6348
6349 @item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6350 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6351 This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
6352 evaluation purposes.
6353
6354 @smallexample
6355 . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
6356 @end smallexample
6357
6358 @item DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6359 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6360 This defines the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment when
6361 @samp{-z relro} option is used.
6362 When @samp{-z relro} option is not present, @code{DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END}
6363 does nothing, otherwise @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} is padded so that
6364 @var{exp} + @var{offset} is aligned to the most commonly used page
6365 boundary for particular target. If present in the linker script,
6366 it must always come in between @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} and
6367 @code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}. Evaluates to the second argument plus any
6368 padding needed at the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment due to
6369 section alignment.
6370
6371 @smallexample
6372 . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
6373 @end smallexample
6374
6375 @item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6376 @kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6377 @cindex symbol defaults
6378 Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
6379 defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
6380 return 0. You can use this function to provide
6381 default values for symbols. For example, the following script fragment
6382 shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
6383 the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
6384 existed, its value is preserved:
6385
6386 @smallexample
6387 @group
6388 SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6389 .text : @{
6390 begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
6391 @dots{}
6392 @}
6393 @dots{}
6394 @}
6395 @end group
6396 @end smallexample
6397
6398 @item LENGTH(@var{memory})
6399 @kindex LENGTH(@var{memory})
6400 Return the length of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6401
6402 @item LOADADDR(@var{section})
6403 @kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
6404 @cindex section load address in expression
6405 Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}. (@pxref{Output
6406 Section LMA}).
6407
6408 @item LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6409 @kindex LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6410 Return the binary logarithm of @var{exp} rounded towards infinity.
6411 @code{LOG2CEIL(0)} returns 0.
6412
6413 @kindex MAX
6414 @item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6415 Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6416
6417 @kindex MIN
6418 @item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6419 Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6420
6421 @item NEXT(@var{exp})
6422 @kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
6423 @cindex unallocated address, next
6424 Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
6425 This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
6426 use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
6427 output file, the two functions are equivalent.
6428
6429 @item ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6430 @kindex ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6431 Return the origin of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6432
6433 @item SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6434 @kindex SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6435 Return the base address of the named @var{segment}. If an explicit
6436 value has already been given for this segment (with a command-line
6437 @samp{-T} option) then that value will be returned otherwise the value
6438 will be @var{default}. At present, the @samp{-T} command-line option
6439 can only be used to set the base address for the ``text'', ``data'', and
6440 ``bss'' sections, but you can use @code{SEGMENT_START} with any segment
6441 name.
6442
6443 @item SIZEOF(@var{section})
6444 @kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
6445 @cindex section size
6446 Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6447 been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6448 evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6449 @code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
6450 @smallexample
6451 @group
6452 SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6453 .output @{
6454 .start = . ;
6455 @dots{}
6456 .end = . ;
6457 @}
6458 symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
6459 symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
6460 @dots{} @}
6461 @end group
6462 @end smallexample
6463
6464 @item SIZEOF_HEADERS
6465 @itemx sizeof_headers
6466 @kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
6467 @cindex header size
6468 Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
6469 information which appears at the start of the output file. You can use
6470 this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
6471 choose, to facilitate paging.
6472
6473 @cindex not enough room for program headers
6474 @cindex program headers, not enough room
6475 When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
6476 @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
6477 number of program headers before it has determined all the section
6478 addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
6479 additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
6480 room for program headers}. To avoid this error, you must avoid using
6481 the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
6482 script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
6483 you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
6484 command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
6485 @end table
6486
6487 @node Implicit Linker Scripts
6488 @section Implicit Linker Scripts
6489 @cindex implicit linker scripts
6490 If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
6491 an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
6492 linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
6493 linker will report an error.
6494
6495 An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
6496
6497 Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
6498 assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
6499 commands.
6500
6501 Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
6502 at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
6503 read. This can affect archive searching.
6504
6505 @ifset GENERIC
6506 @node Machine Dependent
6507 @chapter Machine Dependent Features
6508
6509 @cindex machine dependencies
6510 @command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
6511 sections describe them. Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
6512 functionality are not listed.
6513
6514 @menu
6515 @ifset H8300
6516 * H8/300:: @command{ld} and the H8/300
6517 @end ifset
6518 @ifset I960
6519 * i960:: @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family
6520 @end ifset
6521 @ifset M68HC11
6522 * M68HC11/68HC12:: @code{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6523 @end ifset
6524 @ifset ARM
6525 * ARM:: @command{ld} and the ARM family
6526 @end ifset
6527 @ifset HPPA
6528 * HPPA ELF32:: @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
6529 @end ifset
6530 @ifset M68K
6531 * M68K:: @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6532 @end ifset
6533 @ifset MIPS
6534 * MIPS:: @command{ld} and the MIPS family
6535 @end ifset
6536 @ifset MMIX
6537 * MMIX:: @command{ld} and MMIX
6538 @end ifset
6539 @ifset MSP430
6540 * MSP430:: @command{ld} and MSP430
6541 @end ifset
6542 @ifset NDS32
6543 * NDS32:: @command{ld} and NDS32
6544 @end ifset
6545 @ifset NIOSII
6546 * Nios II:: @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
6547 @end ifset
6548 @ifset POWERPC
6549 * PowerPC ELF32:: @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6550 @end ifset
6551 @ifset POWERPC64
6552 * PowerPC64 ELF64:: @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6553 @end ifset
6554 @ifset SPU
6555 * SPU ELF:: @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6556 @end ifset
6557 @ifset TICOFF
6558 * TI COFF:: @command{ld} and TI COFF
6559 @end ifset
6560 @ifset WIN32
6561 * WIN32:: @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6562 @end ifset
6563 @ifset XTENSA
6564 * Xtensa:: @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
6565 @end ifset
6566 @end menu
6567 @end ifset
6568
6569 @ifset H8300
6570 @ifclear GENERIC
6571 @raisesections
6572 @end ifclear
6573
6574 @node H8/300
6575 @section @command{ld} and the H8/300
6576
6577 @cindex H8/300 support
6578 For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
6579 you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6580
6581 @table @emph
6582 @cindex relaxing on H8/300
6583 @item relaxing address modes
6584 @command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6585 targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6586 program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6587 respectively.
6588
6589 @cindex synthesizing on H8/300
6590 @item synthesizing instructions
6591 @c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really? -> mov.b only, at least on H8, H8H, H8S
6592 @command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
6593 sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6594 page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
6595 (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
6596 @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
6597 top page of memory).
6598
6599 @command{ld} finds all @code{mov} instructions which use the register
6600 indirect with 32-bit displacement addressing mode, but use a small
6601 displacement inside 16-bit displacement range, and changes them to use
6602 the 16-bit displacement form. (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b
6603 @code{@@}@var{d}:32,ERx} into @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{d}:16,ERx}
6604 whenever the displacement @var{d} is in the 16 bit signed integer
6605 range. Only implemented in ELF-format ld).
6606
6607 @item bit manipulation instructions
6608 @command{ld} finds all bit manipulation instructions like @code{band, bclr,
6609 biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, bxor}
6610 which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6611 page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit address form.
6612 (That is: the linker turns @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:32} into
6613 @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
6614 the top page of memory).
6615
6616 @item system control instructions
6617 @command{ld} finds all @code{ldc.w, stc.w} instructions which use the
6618 32 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
6619 changes them to use 16 bit address form.
6620 (That is: the linker turns @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:32,ccr} into
6621 @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:16,ccr} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
6622 the top page of memory).
6623 @end table
6624
6625 @ifclear GENERIC
6626 @lowersections
6627 @end ifclear
6628 @end ifset
6629
6630 @ifclear GENERIC
6631 @ifset Renesas
6632 @c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
6633 @c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
6634 @node Renesas
6635 @chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
6636
6637 @command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
6638 H8/500, and SH chips. No special features, commands, or command-line
6639 options are required for these chips.
6640 @end ifset
6641 @end ifclear
6642
6643 @ifset I960
6644 @ifclear GENERIC
6645 @raisesections
6646 @end ifclear
6647
6648 @node i960
6649 @section @command{ld} and the Intel 960 Family
6650
6651 @cindex i960 support
6652
6653 You can use the @samp{-A@var{architecture}} command line option to
6654 specify one of the two-letter names identifying members of the 960
6655 family; the option specifies the desired output target, and warns of any
6656 incompatible instructions in the input files. It also modifies the
6657 linker's search strategy for archive libraries, to support the use of
6658 libraries specific to each particular architecture, by including in the
6659 search loop names suffixed with the string identifying the architecture.
6660
6661 For example, if your @command{ld} command line included @w{@samp{-ACA}} as
6662 well as @w{@samp{-ltry}}, the linker would look (in its built-in search
6663 paths, and in any paths you specify with @samp{-L}) for a library with
6664 the names
6665
6666 @smallexample
6667 @group
6668 try
6669 libtry.a
6670 tryca
6671 libtryca.a
6672 @end group
6673 @end smallexample
6674
6675 @noindent
6676 The first two possibilities would be considered in any event; the last
6677 two are due to the use of @w{@samp{-ACA}}.
6678
6679 You can meaningfully use @samp{-A} more than once on a command line, since
6680 the 960 architecture family allows combination of target architectures; each
6681 use will add another pair of name variants to search for when @w{@samp{-l}}
6682 specifies a library.
6683
6684 @cindex @option{--relax} on i960
6685 @cindex relaxing on i960
6686 @command{ld} supports the @samp{--relax} option for the i960 family. If
6687 you specify @samp{--relax}, @command{ld} finds all @code{balx} and
6688 @code{calx} instructions whose targets are within 24 bits, and turns
6689 them into 24-bit program-counter relative @code{bal} and @code{cal}
6690 instructions, respectively. @command{ld} also turns @code{cal}
6691 instructions into @code{bal} instructions when it determines that the
6692 target subroutine is a leaf routine (that is, the target subroutine does
6693 not itself call any subroutines).
6694
6695 @ifclear GENERIC
6696 @lowersections
6697 @end ifclear
6698 @end ifset
6699
6700 @ifset ARM
6701 @ifclear GENERIC
6702 @raisesections
6703 @end ifclear
6704
6705 @ifset M68HC11
6706 @ifclear GENERIC
6707 @raisesections
6708 @end ifclear
6709
6710 @node M68HC11/68HC12
6711 @section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6712
6713 @cindex M68HC11 and 68HC12 support
6714
6715 @subsection Linker Relaxation
6716
6717 For the Motorola 68HC11, @command{ld} can perform these global
6718 optimizations when you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6719
6720 @table @emph
6721 @cindex relaxing on M68HC11
6722 @item relaxing address modes
6723 @command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6724 targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6725 program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6726 respectively.
6727
6728 @command{ld} also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
6729 transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
6730 page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
6731
6732 @item relaxing gcc instruction group
6733 When @command{gcc} is called with @option{-mrelax}, it can emit group
6734 of instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
6735 addressing mode. These instructions consists of @code{bclr} or
6736 @code{bset} instructions.
6737
6738 @end table
6739
6740 @subsection Trampoline Generation
6741
6742 @cindex trampoline generation on M68HC11
6743 @cindex trampoline generation on M68HC12
6744 For 68HC11 and 68HC12, @command{ld} can generate trampoline code to
6745 call a far function using a normal @code{jsr} instruction. The linker
6746 will also change the relocation to some far function to use the
6747 trampoline address instead of the function address. This is typically the
6748 case when a pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact
6749 point to the function trampoline.
6750
6751 @ifclear GENERIC
6752 @lowersections
6753 @end ifclear
6754 @end ifset
6755
6756 @node ARM
6757 @section @command{ld} and the ARM family
6758
6759 @cindex ARM interworking support
6760 @kindex --support-old-code
6761 For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
6762 between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
6763 been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
6764 line option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
6765 libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
6766 option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command line switch should be
6767 given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
6768 which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
6769 the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
6770 non-interworking aware Thumb code.
6771
6772 @cindex thumb entry point
6773 @cindex entry point, thumb
6774 @kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
6775 The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
6776 @samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
6777 But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
6778 branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
6779 executing in Thumb mode straight away.
6780
6781 @cindex PE import table prefixing
6782 @kindex --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables
6783 The @samp{--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables} switch is specifying, that
6784 the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero
6785 element prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate
6786 import tables. By default this option is turned off.
6787
6788 @cindex BE8
6789 @kindex --be8
6790 The @samp{--be8} switch instructs @command{ld} to generate BE8 format
6791 executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian
6792 objects - ie ones which have been assembled with the @option{-EB}
6793 option. The resulting image will contain big-endian data and
6794 little-endian code.
6795
6796 @cindex TARGET1
6797 @kindex --target1-rel
6798 @kindex --target1-abs
6799 The @samp{R_ARM_TARGET1} relocation is typically used for entries in the
6800 @samp{.init_array} section. It is interpreted as either @samp{R_ARM_REL32}
6801 or @samp{R_ARM_ABS32}, depending on the target. The @samp{--target1-rel}
6802 and @samp{--target1-abs} switches override the default.
6803
6804 @cindex TARGET2
6805 @kindex --target2=@var{type}
6806 The @samp{--target2=type} switch overrides the default definition of the
6807 @samp{R_ARM_TARGET2} relocation. Valid values for @samp{type}, their
6808 meanings, and target defaults are as follows:
6809 @table @samp
6810 @item rel
6811 @samp{R_ARM_REL32} (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
6812 @item abs
6813 @samp{R_ARM_ABS32} (arm*-*-symbianelf)
6814 @item got-rel
6815 @samp{R_ARM_GOT_PREL} (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
6816 @end table
6817
6818 @cindex FIX_V4BX
6819 @kindex --fix-v4bx
6820 The @samp{R_ARM_V4BX} relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF
6821 specification) enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
6822 interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, but
6823 also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 objects.
6824
6825 In the latter case, the switch @option{--fix-v4bx} must be passed to the
6826 linker, which causes v4t @code{BX rM} instructions to be rewritten as
6827 @code{MOV PC,rM}, since v4 processors do not have a @code{BX} instruction.
6828
6829 In the former case, the switch should not be used, and @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6830 relocations are ignored.
6831
6832 @cindex FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING
6833 @kindex --fix-v4bx-interworking
6834 Replace @code{BX rM} instructions identified by @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6835 relocations with a branch to the following veneer:
6836
6837 @smallexample
6838 TST rM, #1
6839 MOVEQ PC, rM
6840 BX Rn
6841 @end smallexample
6842
6843 This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 cores
6844 and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer clobbers the
6845 condition flags, so may cause incorrect program behavior in rare cases.
6846
6847 @cindex USE_BLX
6848 @kindex --use-blx
6849 The @samp{--use-blx} switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb
6850 BLX instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various
6851 situations. Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb
6852 code using BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before
6853 each PLT entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
6854
6855 This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need to
6856 specify it if you are using that target.
6857
6858 @cindex VFP11_DENORM_FIX
6859 @kindex --vfp11-denorm-fix
6860 The @samp{--vfp11-denorm-fix} switch enables a link-time workaround for a
6861 bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
6862 instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support code)
6863 to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions before
6864 the support code can read the intended values.
6865
6866 The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
6867 intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a register
6868 and another instruction which writes to the same register, or at least two
6869 intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug only affects
6870 full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this workaround if
6871 you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for further details.
6872
6873 If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can
6874 enable this workaround by specifying the linker option
6875 @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar} if you are using the VFP11 scalar
6876 mode only, or @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=vector} if you are using
6877 vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). The default is
6878 @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=none}.
6879
6880 If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6881 potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6882 such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
6883 first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
6884 instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
6885 the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
6886 are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
6887
6888 @cindex ARM1176 erratum workaround
6889 @kindex --fix-arm1176
6890 @kindex --no-fix-arm1176
6891 The @samp{--fix-arm1176} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum
6892 in certain ARM1176 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you
6893 are targeting ARM v6 (excluding ARM v6T2) or earlier. It can be disabled
6894 unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-arm1176}.
6895
6896 Further information is available in the ``ARM1176JZ-S and ARM1176JZF-S
6897 Programmer Advice Notice'' available on the ARM documentation website at:
6898 http://infocenter.arm.com/.
6899
6900 @cindex STM32L4xx erratum workaround
6901 @kindex --fix-stm32l4xx-629360
6902
6903 The @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360} switch enables a link-time
6904 workaround for a bug in the bus matrix / memory controller for some of
6905 the STM32 Cortex-M4 based products (STM32L4xx). When accessing
6906 off-chip memory via the affected bus for bus reads of 9 words or more,
6907 the bus can generate corrupt data and/or abort. These are only
6908 core-initiated accesses (not DMA), and might affect any access:
6909 integer loads such as LDM, POP and floating-point loads such as VLDM,
6910 VPOP. Stores are not affected.
6911
6912 The bug can be avoided by splitting memory accesses into the
6913 necessary chunks to keep bus reads below 8 words.
6914
6915 The workaround is not enabled by default, this is equivalent to use
6916 @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360=none}. If you know you are using buggy
6917 STM32L4xx hardware, you can enable the workaround by specifying the
6918 linker option @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360}, or the equivalent
6919 @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360=default}.
6920
6921 If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6922 potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6923 such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists in a
6924 replacement sequence emulating the behaviour of the original one and a
6925 branch back to the subsequent instruction. The original instruction is
6926 then replaced with a branch to the veneer.
6927
6928 The workaround does not always preserve the memory access order for
6929 the LDMDB instruction, when the instruction loads the PC.
6930
6931 The workaround is not able to handle problematic instructions when
6932 they are in the middle of an IT block, since a branch is not allowed
6933 there. In that case, the linker reports a warning and no replacement
6934 occurs.
6935
6936 The workaround is not able to replace problematic instructions with a
6937 PC-relative branch instruction if the @samp{.text} section is too
6938 large. In that case, when the branch that replaces the original code
6939 cannot be encoded, the linker reports a warning and no replacement
6940 occurs.
6941
6942 @cindex NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING
6943 @kindex --no-enum-size-warning
6944 The @option{--no-enum-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6945 warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6946 enumeration size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6947 linking of an object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another
6948 using enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will
6949 not be diagnosed.
6950
6951 @cindex NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING
6952 @kindex --no-wchar-size-warning
6953 The @option{--no-wchar-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6954 warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6955 @code{wchar_t} size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6956 linking of an object file using 32-bit @code{wchar_t} values with another
6957 using 16-bit @code{wchar_t} values will not be diagnosed.
6958
6959 @cindex PIC_VENEER
6960 @kindex --pic-veneer
6961 The @samp{--pic-veneer} switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
6962 ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary
6963 is not PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where
6964 @samp{--emit-relocs} is used to generate relocatable binaries.
6965
6966 @cindex STUB_GROUP_SIZE
6967 @kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6968 The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
6969 code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
6970 perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The
6971 placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
6972 controlled by the command line option @option{--stub-group-size=N}.
6973 The placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
6974 duplicate stubs, increasing the code size. The linker will try to
6975 group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
6976 code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
6977 where they should be placed.
6978
6979 The value of @samp{N}, the parameter to the
6980 @option{--stub-group-size=} option controls where the stub groups are
6981 placed. If it is negative then all stubs are placed after the first
6982 branch that needs them. If it is positive then the stubs can be
6983 placed either before or after the branches that need them. If the
6984 value of @samp{N} is 1 (either +1 or -1) then the linker will choose
6985 exactly where to place groups of stubs, using its built in heuristics.
6986 A value of @samp{N} greater than 1 (or smaller than -1) tells the
6987 linker that a single group of stubs can service at most @samp{N} bytes
6988 from the input sections.
6989
6990 The default, if @option{--stub-group-size=} is not specified, is
6991 @samp{N = +1}.
6992
6993 Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
6994 only, because it relies on object files properties not present
6995 otherwise.
6996
6997 @cindex Cortex-A8 erratum workaround
6998 @kindex --fix-cortex-a8
6999 @kindex --no-fix-cortex-a8
7000 The @samp{--fix-cortex-a8} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum in certain Cortex-A8 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you are targeting the ARM v7-A architecture profile. It can be enabled otherwise by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a8}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a8}.
7001
7002 The erratum only affects Thumb-2 code. Please contact ARM for further details.
7003
7004 @cindex Cortex-A53 erratum 835769 workaround
7005 @kindex --fix-cortex-a53-835769
7006 @kindex --no-fix-cortex-a53-835769
7007 The @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769} switch enables a link-time workaround for erratum 835769 present on certain early revisions of Cortex-A53 processors. The workaround is disabled by default. It can be enabled by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a53-835769}.
7008
7009 Please contact ARM for further details.
7010
7011 @kindex --merge-exidx-entries
7012 @kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
7013 @cindex Merging exidx entries
7014 The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent exidx entries in debuginfo.
7015
7016 @kindex --long-plt
7017 @cindex 32-bit PLT entries
7018 The @samp{--long-plt} option enables the use of 16 byte PLT entries
7019 which support up to 4Gb of code. The default is to use 12 byte PLT
7020 entries which only support 512Mb of code.
7021
7022 @kindex --no-apply-dynamic-relocs
7023 @cindex AArch64 rela addend
7024 The @samp{--no-apply-dynamic-relocs} option makes AArch64 linker do not apply
7025 link-time values for dynamic relocations.
7026
7027 @cindex Placement of SG veneers
7028 All SG veneers are placed in the special output section @code{.gnu.sgstubs}.
7029 Its start address must be set, either with the command line option
7030 @samp{--section-start} or in a linker script, to indicate where to place these
7031 veneers in memory.
7032
7033 @kindex --cmse-implib
7034 @cindex Secure gateway import library
7035 The @samp{--cmse-implib} option requests that the import libraries
7036 specified by the @samp{--out-implib} and @samp{--in-implib} options are
7037 secure gateway import libraries, suitable for linking a non-secure
7038 executable against secure code as per ARMv8-M Security Extensions.
7039
7040 @kindex --in-implib=@var{file}
7041 @cindex Input import library
7042 The @samp{--in-implib=file} specifies an input import library whose symbols
7043 must keep the same address in the executable being produced. A warning is
7044 given if no @samp{--out-implib} is given but new symbols have been introduced
7045 in the executable that should be listed in its import library. Otherwise, if
7046 @samp{--out-implib} is specified, the symbols are added to the output import
7047 library. A warning is also given if some symbols present in the input import
7048 library have disappeared from the executable. This option is only effective
7049 for Secure Gateway import libraries, ie. when @samp{--cmse-implib} is
7050 specified.
7051
7052 @ifclear GENERIC
7053 @lowersections
7054 @end ifclear
7055 @end ifset
7056
7057 @ifset HPPA
7058 @ifclear GENERIC
7059 @raisesections
7060 @end ifclear
7061
7062 @node HPPA ELF32
7063 @section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
7064 @cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
7065 @kindex --multi-subspace
7066 When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
7067 import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
7068 The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
7069 stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
7070 multiple sub-spaces.
7071
7072 @cindex HPPA stub grouping
7073 @kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
7074 Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
7075 stub sections located between groups of input sections.
7076 @samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
7077 sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
7078 a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
7079 the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
7080 conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
7081 prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
7082 A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
7083 branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
7084 @samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
7085 @command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
7086 detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
7087 positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
7088
7089 Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
7090 single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
7091 create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
7092 large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
7093
7094 @ifclear GENERIC
7095 @lowersections
7096 @end ifclear
7097 @end ifset
7098
7099 @ifset M68K
7100 @ifclear GENERIC
7101 @raisesections
7102 @end ifclear
7103
7104 @node M68K
7105 @section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
7106
7107 @cindex Motorola 68K GOT generation
7108 @kindex --got=@var{type}
7109 The @samp{--got=@var{type}} option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.
7110 The choices are @samp{single}, @samp{negative}, @samp{multigot} and
7111 @samp{target}. When @samp{target} is selected the linker chooses
7112 the default GOT generation scheme for the current target.
7113 @samp{single} tells the linker to generate a single GOT with
7114 entries only at non-negative offsets.
7115 @samp{negative} instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with
7116 entries at both negative and positive offsets. Not all environments
7117 support such GOTs.
7118 @samp{multigot} allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the
7119 output file. All GOT references from a single input object
7120 file access the same GOT, but references from different input object
7121 files might access different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
7122
7123 @ifclear GENERIC
7124 @lowersections
7125 @end ifclear
7126 @end ifset
7127
7128 @ifset MIPS
7129 @ifclear GENERIC
7130 @raisesections
7131 @end ifclear
7132
7133 @node MIPS
7134 @section @command{ld} and the MIPS family
7135
7136 @cindex MIPS microMIPS instruction choice selection
7137 @kindex --insn32
7138 @kindex --no-insn32
7139 The @samp{--insn32} and @samp{--no-insn32} options control the choice of
7140 microMIPS instructions used in code generated by the linker, such as that
7141 in the PLT or lazy binding stubs, or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is
7142 used, then the linker only uses 32-bit instruction encodings. By default
7143 or if @samp{--no-insn32} is used, all instruction encodings are used,
7144 including 16-bit ones where possible.
7145
7146 @cindex MIPS branch relocation check control
7147 @kindex --ignore-branch-isa
7148 @kindex --no-ignore-branch-isa
7149 The @samp{--ignore-branch-isa} and @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} options
7150 control branch relocation checks for invalid ISA mode transitions. If
7151 @samp{--ignore-branch-isa} is used, then the linker accepts any branch
7152 relocations and any ISA mode transition required is lost in relocation
7153 calculation, except for some cases of @code{BAL} instructions which meet
7154 relaxation conditions and are converted to equivalent @code{JALX}
7155 instructions as the associated relocation is calculated. By default
7156 or if @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} is used a check is made causing
7157 the loss of an ISA mode transition to produce an error.
7158
7159 @ifclear GENERIC
7160 @lowersections
7161 @end ifclear
7162 @end ifset
7163
7164 @ifset MMIX
7165 @ifclear GENERIC
7166 @raisesections
7167 @end ifclear
7168
7169 @node MMIX
7170 @section @code{ld} and MMIX
7171 For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
7172 @code{mmo} object files when linking. The simulator @code{mmix}
7173 understands the @code{mmo} format. The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
7174 can translate between the two formats.
7175
7176 There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
7177 Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
7178 registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
7179 equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
7180 @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
7181 global register multiplied by 8. Register @code{$255} is not included in
7182 this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
7183 symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
7184
7185 Global symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
7186 @code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special.
7187 The default linker script uses these to set the default start address
7188 of a section.
7189
7190 Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
7191 are left out from an mmo file.
7192
7193 @ifclear GENERIC
7194 @lowersections
7195 @end ifclear
7196 @end ifset
7197
7198 @ifset MSP430
7199 @ifclear GENERIC
7200 @raisesections
7201 @end ifclear
7202
7203 @node MSP430
7204 @section @code{ld} and MSP430
7205 For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
7206 will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs
7207 just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
7208
7209 @cindex MSP430 extra sections
7210 The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
7211
7212 @table @code
7213 @item @samp{.vectors}
7214 Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
7215
7216 @item @samp{.bootloader}
7217 Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any code
7218 in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
7219
7220 @item @samp{.infomem}
7221 Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
7222 this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
7223
7224 @item @samp{.infomemnobits}
7225 This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
7226 in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
7227
7228 @item @samp{.noinit}
7229 Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
7230
7231 The last two sections are used by gcc.
7232 @end table
7233
7234 @ifclear GENERIC
7235 @lowersections
7236 @end ifclear
7237 @end ifset
7238
7239 @ifset NDS32
7240 @ifclear GENERIC
7241 @raisesections
7242 @end ifclear
7243
7244 @node NDS32
7245 @section @code{ld} and NDS32
7246 @kindex relaxing on NDS32
7247 For NDS32, there are some options to select relaxation behavior. The linker
7248 relaxes objects according to these options.
7249
7250 @table @code
7251 @item @samp{--m[no-]fp-as-gp}
7252 Disable/enable fp-as-gp relaxation.
7253
7254 @item @samp{--mexport-symbols=FILE}
7255 Exporting symbols and their address into FILE as linker script.
7256
7257 @item @samp{--m[no-]ex9}
7258 Disable/enable link-time EX9 relaxation.
7259
7260 @item @samp{--mexport-ex9=FILE}
7261 Export the EX9 table after linking.
7262
7263 @item @samp{--mimport-ex9=FILE}
7264 Import the Ex9 table for EX9 relaxation.
7265
7266 @item @samp{--mupdate-ex9}
7267 Update the existing EX9 table.
7268
7269 @item @samp{--mex9-limit=NUM}
7270 Maximum number of entries in the ex9 table.
7271
7272 @item @samp{--mex9-loop-aware}
7273 Avoid generating the EX9 instruction inside the loop.
7274
7275 @item @samp{--m[no-]ifc}
7276 Disable/enable the link-time IFC optimization.
7277
7278 @item @samp{--mifc-loop-aware}
7279 Avoid generating the IFC instruction inside the loop.
7280 @end table
7281
7282 @ifclear GENERIC
7283 @lowersections
7284 @end ifclear
7285 @end ifset
7286
7287 @ifset NIOSII
7288 @ifclear GENERIC
7289 @raisesections
7290 @end ifclear
7291
7292 @node Nios II
7293 @section @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
7294 @cindex Nios II call relaxation
7295 @kindex --relax on Nios II
7296
7297 Call and immediate jump instructions on Nios II processors are limited to
7298 transferring control to addresses in the same 256MB memory segment,
7299 which may result in @command{ld} giving
7300 @samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
7301 The command-line option @option{--relax} enables the generation of
7302 trampolines that can access the entire 32-bit address space for calls
7303 outside the normal @code{call} and @code{jmpi} address range. These
7304 trampolines are inserted at section boundaries, so may not themselves
7305 be reachable if an input section and its associated call trampolines are
7306 larger than 256MB.
7307
7308 The @option{--relax} option is enabled by default unless @option{-r}
7309 is also specified. You can disable trampoline generation by using the
7310 @option{--no-relax} linker option. You can also disable this optimization
7311 locally by using the @samp{set .noat} directive in assembly-language
7312 source files, as the linker-inserted trampolines use the @code{at}
7313 register as a temporary.
7314
7315 Note that the linker @option{--relax} option is independent of assembler
7316 relaxation options, and that using the GNU assembler's @option{-relax-all}
7317 option interferes with the linker's more selective call instruction relaxation.
7318
7319 @ifclear GENERIC
7320 @lowersections
7321 @end ifclear
7322 @end ifset
7323
7324 @ifset POWERPC
7325 @ifclear GENERIC
7326 @raisesections
7327 @end ifclear
7328
7329 @node PowerPC ELF32
7330 @section @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
7331 @cindex PowerPC long branches
7332 @kindex --relax on PowerPC
7333 Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
7334 displacement, which may result in @command{ld} giving
7335 @samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
7336 @samp{--relax} enables the generation of trampolines that can access
7337 the entire 32-bit address space. These trampolines are inserted at
7338 section boundaries, so may not themselves be reachable if an input
7339 section exceeds 33M in size. You may combine @samp{-r} and
7340 @samp{--relax} to add trampolines in a partial link. In that case
7341 both branches to undefined symbols and inter-section branches are also
7342 considered potentially out of range, and trampolines inserted.
7343
7344 @cindex PowerPC ELF32 options
7345 @table @option
7346 @cindex PowerPC PLT
7347 @kindex --bss-plt
7348 @item --bss-plt
7349 Current PowerPC GCC accepts a @samp{-msecure-plt} option that
7350 generates code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has
7351 the security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
7352 writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
7353 @command{ld} will generate this layout, including stubs to access the
7354 PLT, if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
7355 compiled with @samp{-msecure-plt}. @samp{--bss-plt} forces the old
7356 BSS PLT (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
7357
7358 @kindex --secure-plt
7359 @item --secure-plt
7360 @command{ld} will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
7361 @samp{-fpic} or @samp{-fPIC} code, but does not do so automatically
7362 when linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
7363 layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the old
7364 style BSS PLT.
7365
7366 @cindex PowerPC GOT
7367 @kindex --sdata-got
7368 @item --sdata-got
7369 The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
7370 sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The location of
7371 @code{.plt} must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
7372 section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The reason for the
7373 @code{.got} change is more subtle: The new placement allows
7374 @code{.got} to be read-only in applications linked with
7375 @samp{-z relro -z now}. However, this placement means that
7376 @code{.sdata} cannot always be used in shared libraries, because the
7377 PowerPC ABI accesses @code{.sdata} in shared libraries from the GOT
7378 pointer. @samp{--sdata-got} forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC
7379 GCC doesn't use @code{.sdata} in shared libraries, so this option is
7380 really only useful for other compilers that may do so.
7381
7382 @cindex PowerPC stub symbols
7383 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
7384 @item --emit-stub-syms
7385 This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7386 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7387
7388 @cindex PowerPC TLS optimization
7389 @kindex --no-tls-optimize
7390 @item --no-tls-optimize
7391 PowerPC @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7392 sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7393 disable the optimization.
7394 @end table
7395
7396 @ifclear GENERIC
7397 @lowersections
7398 @end ifclear
7399 @end ifset
7400
7401 @ifset POWERPC64
7402 @ifclear GENERIC
7403 @raisesections
7404 @end ifclear
7405
7406 @node PowerPC64 ELF64
7407 @section @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
7408
7409 @cindex PowerPC64 ELF64 options
7410 @table @option
7411 @cindex PowerPC64 stub grouping
7412 @kindex --stub-group-size
7413 @item --stub-group-size
7414 Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are placed
7415 by @command{ld} in stub sections located between groups of input sections.
7416 @samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
7417 sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
7418 a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
7419 the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
7420 conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
7421 prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
7422 A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
7423 branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
7424 @samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
7425 @command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
7426 detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
7427 positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
7428
7429 Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
7430 single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
7431 create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
7432 large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
7433
7434 @cindex PowerPC64 stub symbols
7435 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
7436 @item --emit-stub-syms
7437 This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7438 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7439
7440 @cindex PowerPC64 dot symbols
7441 @kindex --dotsyms
7442 @kindex --no-dotsyms
7443 @item --dotsyms
7444 @itemx --no-dotsyms
7445 These two options control how @command{ld} interprets version patterns
7446 in a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
7447 function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a
7448 code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (@samp{.}). To
7449 properly version a function @samp{foo}, the version script thus needs
7450 to control both @samp{foo} and @samp{.foo}. The option
7451 @samp{--dotsyms}, on by default, automatically adds the required
7452 dot-prefixed patterns. Use @samp{--no-dotsyms} to disable this
7453 feature.
7454
7455 @cindex PowerPC64 register save/restore functions
7456 @kindex --save-restore-funcs
7457 @kindex --no-save-restore-funcs
7458 @item --save-restore-funcs
7459 @itemx --no-save-restore-funcs
7460 These two options control whether PowerPC64 @command{ld} automatically
7461 provides out-of-line register save and restore functions used by
7462 @samp{-Os} code. The default is to provide any such referenced
7463 function for a normal final link, and to not do so for a relocatable
7464 link.
7465
7466 @cindex PowerPC64 TLS optimization
7467 @kindex --no-tls-optimize
7468 @item --no-tls-optimize
7469 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7470 sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7471 disable the optimization.
7472
7473 @cindex PowerPC64 __tls_get_addr optimization
7474 @kindex --tls-get-addr-optimize
7475 @kindex --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
7476 @item --tls-get-addr-optimize
7477 @itemx --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
7478 These options control whether PowerPC64 @command{ld} uses a special
7479 stub to call __tls_get_addr. PowerPC64 glibc 2.22 and later support
7480 an optimization that allows the second and subsequent calls to
7481 @code{__tls_get_addr} for a given symbol to be resolved by the special
7482 stub without calling in to glibc. By default the linker enables this
7483 option when glibc advertises the availability of __tls_get_addr_opt.
7484 Forcing this option on when using an older glibc won't do much besides
7485 slow down your applications, but may be useful if linking an
7486 application against an older glibc with the expectation that it will
7487 normally be used on systems having a newer glibc.
7488
7489 @cindex PowerPC64 OPD optimization
7490 @kindex --no-opd-optimize
7491 @item --no-opd-optimize
7492 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes @code{.opd} section entries
7493 corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed by
7494 the action of @samp{--gc-sections} or linker script @code{/DISCARD/}.
7495 Use this option to disable @code{.opd} optimization.
7496
7497 @cindex PowerPC64 OPD spacing
7498 @kindex --non-overlapping-opd
7499 @item --non-overlapping-opd
7500 Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
7501 @code{.opd} entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
7502 the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the next
7503 entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
7504
7505 @cindex PowerPC64 TOC optimization
7506 @kindex --no-toc-optimize
7507 @item --no-toc-optimize
7508 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes unused @code{.toc} section
7509 entries. Such entries are detected by examining relocations that
7510 reference the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section
7511 marks a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section
7512 marks a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
7513 relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
7514 unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
7515 reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
7516 discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
7517 reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if assembly
7518 code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to disable the
7519 optimization.
7520
7521 @cindex PowerPC64 multi-TOC
7522 @kindex --no-multi-toc
7523 @item --no-multi-toc
7524 If given any toc option besides @code{-mcmodel=medium} or
7525 @code{-mcmodel=large}, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model
7526 where TOC
7527 entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This limits the
7528 total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 @command{ld} extends this limit by
7529 grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for its
7530 TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between inter-group
7531 calls. @command{ld} does not split apart input sections, so cannot
7532 help if a single input file has a @code{.toc} section that exceeds
7533 64K, most likely from linking multiple files with @command{ld -r}.
7534 Use this option to turn off this feature.
7535
7536 @cindex PowerPC64 TOC sorting
7537 @kindex --no-toc-sort
7538 @item --no-toc-sort
7539 By default, @command{ld} sorts TOC sections so that those whose file
7540 happens to have a section called @code{.init} or @code{.fini} are
7541 placed first, followed by TOC sections referenced by code generated
7542 with PowerPC64 gcc's @code{-mcmodel=small}, and lastly TOC sections
7543 referenced only by code generated with PowerPC64 gcc's
7544 @code{-mcmodel=medium} or @code{-mcmodel=large} options. Doing this
7545 results in better TOC grouping for multi-TOC. Use this option to turn
7546 off this feature.
7547
7548 @cindex PowerPC64 PLT stub alignment
7549 @kindex --plt-align
7550 @kindex --no-plt-align
7551 @item --plt-align
7552 @itemx --no-plt-align
7553 Use these options to control whether individual PLT call stubs are
7554 padded so that they don't cross a 32-byte boundary, or to the
7555 specified power of two boundary when using @code{--plt-align=}. Note
7556 that this isn't alignment in the usual sense. By default PLT call
7557 stubs are packed tightly.
7558
7559 @cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub static chain
7560 @kindex --plt-static-chain
7561 @kindex --no-plt-static-chain
7562 @item --plt-static-chain
7563 @itemx --no-plt-static-chain
7564 Use these options to control whether PLT call stubs load the static
7565 chain pointer (r11). @code{ld} defaults to not loading the static
7566 chain since there is never any need to do so on a PLT call.
7567
7568 @cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub thread safety
7569 @kindex --plt-thread-safe
7570 @kindex --no-plt-thread-safe
7571 @item --plt-thread-safe
7572 @itemx --no-thread-safe
7573 With power7's weakly ordered memory model, it is possible when using
7574 lazy binding for ld.so to update a plt entry in one thread and have
7575 another thread see the individual plt entry words update in the wrong
7576 order, despite ld.so carefully writing in the correct order and using
7577 memory write barriers. To avoid this we need some sort of read
7578 barrier in the call stub, or use LD_BIND_NOW=1. By default, @code{ld}
7579 looks for calls to commonly used functions that create threads, and if
7580 seen, adds the necessary barriers. Use these options to change the
7581 default behaviour.
7582 @end table
7583
7584 @ifclear GENERIC
7585 @lowersections
7586 @end ifclear
7587 @end ifset
7588
7589 @ifset SPU
7590 @ifclear GENERIC
7591 @raisesections
7592 @end ifclear
7593
7594 @node SPU ELF
7595 @section @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
7596
7597 @cindex SPU ELF options
7598 @table @option
7599
7600 @cindex SPU plugins
7601 @kindex --plugin
7602 @item --plugin
7603 This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
7604
7605 @cindex SPU overlays
7606 @kindex --no-overlays
7607 @item --no-overlays
7608 Normally, @command{ld} recognizes calls to functions within overlay
7609 regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
7610 @command{ld} also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option
7611 turns off all this special overlay handling.
7612
7613 @cindex SPU overlay stub symbols
7614 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
7615 @item --emit-stub-syms
7616 This option causes @command{ld} to label overlay stubs with a local
7617 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7618
7619 @cindex SPU extra overlay stubs
7620 @kindex --extra-overlay-stubs
7621 @item --extra-overlay-stubs
7622 This option causes @command{ld} to add overlay call stubs on all
7623 function calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added
7624 on calls to non-overlay regions.
7625
7626 @cindex SPU local store size
7627 @kindex --local-store=lo:hi
7628 @item --local-store=lo:hi
7629 @command{ld} usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in
7630 the address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
7631 range. Disable the check entirely with @option{--local-store=0:0}.
7632
7633 @cindex SPU
7634 @kindex --stack-analysis
7635 @item --stack-analysis
7636 SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
7637 unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
7638 under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this option,
7639 @command{ld} will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
7640 @command{ld} does this by examining symbols in code sections to
7641 determine the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues
7642 for stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking
7643 for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched
7644 for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
7645 find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle recursion
7646 and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
7647 under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage for
7648 dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a link map
7649 is requested, detailed information about each function's stack usage
7650 and calls will be given.
7651
7652 @cindex SPU
7653 @kindex --emit-stack-syms
7654 @item --emit-stack-syms
7655 This option, if given along with @option{--stack-analysis} will result
7656 in @command{ld} emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.
7657 These take the form @code{__stack_<function_name>} for global
7658 functions, and @code{__stack_<number>_<function_name>} for static
7659 functions. @code{<number>} is the section id in hex. The value of
7660 such symbols is the stack requirement for the corresponding function.
7661 The symbol size will be zero, type @code{STT_NOTYPE}, binding
7662 @code{STB_LOCAL}, and section @code{SHN_ABS}.
7663 @end table
7664
7665 @ifclear GENERIC
7666 @lowersections
7667 @end ifclear
7668 @end ifset
7669
7670 @ifset TICOFF
7671 @ifclear GENERIC
7672 @raisesections
7673 @end ifclear
7674
7675 @node TI COFF
7676 @section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
7677 @cindex TI COFF versions
7678 @kindex --format=@var{version}
7679 The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
7680 TI COFF versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
7681 also supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
7682 format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
7683 header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
7684
7685 @ifclear GENERIC
7686 @lowersections
7687 @end ifclear
7688 @end ifset
7689
7690 @ifset WIN32
7691 @ifclear GENERIC
7692 @raisesections
7693 @end ifclear
7694
7695 @node WIN32
7696 @section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
7697
7698 This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
7699 See @ref{Options,,Command Line Options} for detailed description of the
7700 command line options mentioned here.
7701
7702 @table @emph
7703 @cindex import libraries
7704 @item import libraries
7705 The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
7706 libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They are
7707 regular static archives and are handled as any other static
7708 archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
7709 support for creating such libraries provided with the
7710 @samp{--out-implib} command line option.
7711
7712 @item exporting DLL symbols
7713 @cindex exporting DLL symbols
7714 The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
7715
7716 @table @emph
7717 @item using auto-export functionality
7718 @cindex using auto-export functionality
7719 By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
7720 which is controlled by the following command line options:
7721
7722 @itemize
7723 @item --export-all-symbols [This is the default]
7724 @item --exclude-symbols
7725 @item --exclude-libs
7726 @item --exclude-modules-for-implib
7727 @item --version-script
7728 @end itemize
7729
7730 When auto-export is in operation, @command{ld} will export all the non-local
7731 (global and common) symbols it finds in a DLL, with the exception of a few
7732 symbols known to belong to the system's runtime and libraries. As it will
7733 often not be desirable to export all of a DLL's symbols, which may include
7734 private functions that are not part of any public interface, the command-line
7735 options listed above may be used to filter symbols out from the list for
7736 exporting. The @samp{--output-def} option can be used in order to see the
7737 final list of exported symbols with all exclusions taken into effect.
7738
7739 If @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
7740 command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
7741 if either of the following are true:
7742
7743 @itemize
7744 @item A DEF file is used.
7745 @item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
7746 @end itemize
7747
7748 @item using a DEF file
7749 @cindex using a DEF file
7750 Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF file is
7751 an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
7752 exported when a dll is created. Usually it is named @samp{<dll
7753 name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
7754 command line. The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
7755
7756 @example
7757 gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
7758 @end example
7759
7760 Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
7761 @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7762
7763 Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
7764
7765 @example
7766 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
7767
7768 EXPORTS
7769 foo
7770 bar
7771 _bar = bar
7772 another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
7773 var1 DATA
7774 doo = foo == foo2
7775 eoo DATA == var1
7776 @end example
7777
7778 This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and seven
7779 symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol @code{_bar} is an
7780 alias for the second. The fourth symbol, @code{another_foo} is resolved
7781 by "forwarding" to another module and treating it as an alias for
7782 @code{afoo} exported from the DLL @samp{abc.dll}. The final symbol
7783 @code{var1} is declared to be a data object. The @samp{doo} symbol in
7784 export library is an alias of @samp{foo}, which gets the string name
7785 in export table @samp{foo2}. The @samp{eoo} symbol is an data export
7786 symbol, which gets in export table the name @samp{var1}.
7787
7788 The optional @code{LIBRARY <name>} command indicates the @emph{internal}
7789 name of the output DLL. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix,
7790 the default library suffix, @samp{.DLL} is appended.
7791
7792 When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather than a
7793 library, the @code{NAME <name>} command should be used instead of
7794 @code{LIBRARY}. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix, the default
7795 executable suffix, @samp{.EXE} is appended.
7796
7797 With either @code{LIBRARY <name>} or @code{NAME <name>} the optional
7798 specification @code{BASE = <number>} may be used to specify a
7799 non-default base address for the image.
7800
7801 If neither @code{LIBRARY <name>} nor @code{NAME <name>} is specified,
7802 or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as the
7803 filename specified on the command line.
7804
7805 The complete specification of an export symbol is:
7806
7807 @example
7808 EXPORTS
7809 ( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
7810 | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
7811 [ @@ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] [== <name3>] ) *
7812 @end example
7813
7814 Declares @samp{<name1>} as an exported symbol from the DLL, or declares
7815 @samp{<name1>} as an exported alias for @samp{<name2>}; or declares
7816 @samp{<name1>} as a "forward" alias for the symbol
7817 @samp{<external-name>} in the DLL @samp{<module-name>}.
7818 Optionally, the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
7819 @samp{<integer>} alias. The optional @samp{<name3>} is the to be used
7820 string in import/export table for the symbol.
7821
7822 The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
7823
7824 @code{NONAME}: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export table. It
7825 will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either the value specified
7826 by the .def specification or, otherwise, the value assigned by the
7827 linker). The symbol name, however, does remain visible in the import
7828 library (if any), unless @code{PRIVATE} is also specified.
7829
7830 @code{DATA}: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a function.
7831 The import lib will export only an indirect reference to @code{foo} as
7832 the symbol @code{_imp__foo} (ie, @code{foo} must be resolved as
7833 @code{*_imp__foo}).
7834
7835 @code{CONSTANT}: Like @code{DATA}, but put the undecorated @code{foo} as
7836 well as @code{_imp__foo} into the import library. Both refer to the
7837 read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not to the
7838 variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user code fails to add
7839 the @code{dllimport} attribute and also fails to explicitly add the
7840 extra indirection that the use of the attribute enforces, the
7841 application will behave unexpectedly.
7842
7843 @code{PRIVATE}: Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do not put
7844 it into the static import library used to resolve imports at link time. The
7845 symbol can still be imported using the @code{LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress}
7846 API at runtime or by by using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to
7847 the DLL without an import library.
7848
7849 See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full specification of
7850 other DEF file statements
7851
7852 @cindex creating a DEF file
7853 While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
7854 with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command line option.
7855
7856 @item Using decorations
7857 @cindex Using decorations
7858 Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
7859 itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
7860 declared as:
7861
7862 @example
7863 __declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
7864 __declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
7865 @end example
7866
7867 All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
7868 any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
7869 this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
7870 the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7871
7872 Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
7873 decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use dllimport,
7874 instead:
7875
7876 @example
7877 __declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
7878 __declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
7879 @end example
7880
7881 This complicates the structure of library header files, because
7882 when included by the library itself the header must declare the
7883 variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
7884 code the header must declare them as dllimport. There are a number
7885 of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
7886 omit the __declspec() declaration completely. See
7887 @samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
7888 information.
7889 @end table
7890
7891 @cindex automatic data imports
7892 @item automatic data imports
7893 The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
7894 by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
7895 compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
7896 issue. This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
7897 code to these platforms, especially for large
7898 c++ libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
7899 initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
7900 decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
7901 platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
7902 command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
7903 The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
7904 suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
7905 trigger the feature's use.
7906
7907 auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
7908 additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
7909
7910 "variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
7911 documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
7912
7913 The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
7914 occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
7915 One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
7916 below.
7917
7918 @cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
7919 For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
7920 object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
7921 offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
7922 field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
7923 in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
7924 without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
7925 The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
7926 references.
7927
7928 The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
7929 be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
7930 themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
7931 runtime environment. Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
7932 compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
7933 support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
7934 run without error on an older system.
7935
7936 @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
7937 enabled as needed.
7938
7939 @cindex direct linking to a dll
7940 @item direct linking to a dll
7941 The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
7942 including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
7943 libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
7944 traditional import library method, especially when linking large
7945 libraries or applications. When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
7946 function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
7947 though a single bfd could contain many exports. The overhead involved in
7948 storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
7949 tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
7950 large or complex libraries when using import libs.
7951
7952 Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
7953 @samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
7954 of names to match each library. All that is needed from the developer's
7955 perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
7956 select the dll instead of an import library.
7957
7958
7959 For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
7960 to find, in the first directory of its search path,
7961
7962 @example
7963 libxxx.dll.a
7964 xxx.dll.a
7965 libxxx.a
7966 xxx.lib
7967 cygxxx.dll (*)
7968 libxxx.dll
7969 xxx.dll
7970 @end example
7971
7972 before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
7973
7974 (*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
7975 where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
7976 @samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
7977 file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
7978 @samp{cygxxx.dll}.
7979
7980 Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
7981 @samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature. It
7982 was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
7983 various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
7984 could coexist on the same machine.
7985
7986 The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
7987 applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
7988 libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
7989
7990 @example
7991 bin/
7992 cygxxx.dll
7993 lib/
7994 libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
7995 libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
7996 @end example
7997
7998 Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
7999 done two ways:
8000
8001 1. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
8002 @example
8003 gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
8004 @end example
8005
8006 However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
8007 (@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
8008 @samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version. Import libs are generally
8009 not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
8010
8011 2. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
8012 directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
8013 should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
8014 making the app/dll.
8015
8016 @example
8017 ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
8018 @end example
8019
8020 Then you can link without any make environment changes.
8021
8022 @example
8023 gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
8024 @end example
8025
8026 This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
8027 perfectly legal
8028
8029 @example
8030 bin/
8031 cygxxx-5.dll
8032 lib/
8033 libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
8034 @end example
8035
8036 Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
8037 even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
8038 @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
8039
8040 Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
8041 wonder why import libraries are used at all. There are three reasons:
8042
8043 1. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
8044 work with auto-imported data.
8045
8046 2. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
8047 import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
8048 symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again, the import lib
8049 for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
8050 possible to do this without an import lib.
8051
8052 3. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This is
8053 critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 API)
8054 in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases of their
8055 stdcall-decorated assembly names.
8056
8057 So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
8058 true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
8059 a dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
8060 binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
8061 massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
8062 requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
8063 will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
8064
8065 @item symbol aliasing
8066 @table @emph
8067 @item adding additional names
8068 Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
8069 A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
8070 exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
8071 when creating the dll. This will affect also the optional created
8072 import library. Consider the following DEF file:
8073
8074 @example
8075 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
8076
8077 EXPORTS
8078 foo
8079 _foo = foo
8080 @end example
8081
8082 The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
8083
8084 Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
8085 source code using the "weak" attribute:
8086
8087 @example
8088 void foo () @{ /* Do something. */; @}
8089 void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
8090 @end example
8091
8092 See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
8093 symbols.
8094
8095 @item renaming symbols
8096 Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the cygwin
8097 kernel does this regularly. A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
8098 @samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
8099 DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
8100 created). In the following example:
8101
8102 @example
8103 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
8104
8105 EXPORTS
8106 _foo = foo
8107 @end example
8108
8109 The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
8110 @samp{_foo}.
8111 @end table
8112
8113 Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
8114 unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command line option is used.
8115 If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
8116 @emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
8117 that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
8118 @samp{--export-all-symbols} option. If you list only the
8119 renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
8120 to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
8121 the original names for the renamed symbols will be exported.
8122 In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
8123 which is probably not what you wanted.
8124
8125 @cindex weak externals
8126 @item weak externals
8127 The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols called
8128 weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol is not
8129 defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other symbol. There
8130 are three variants of weak externals:
8131 @itemize
8132 @item Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, historically
8133 called lazy externals.
8134 @item Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in libraries.
8135 This form is not presently implemented.
8136 @item No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
8137 implemented.
8138 @end itemize
8139 As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate symbol
8140 are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking, the symbol
8141 uses a default value.
8142
8143 @cindex aligned common symbols
8144 @item aligned common symbols
8145 As a GNU extension to the PE file format, it is possible to specify the
8146 desired alignment for a common symbol. This information is conveyed from
8147 the assembler or compiler to the linker by means of GNU-specific commands
8148 carried in the object file's @samp{.drectve} section, which are recognized
8149 by @command{ld} and respected when laying out the common symbols. Native
8150 tools will be able to process object files employing this GNU extension,
8151 but will fail to respect the alignment instructions, and may issue noisy
8152 warnings about unknown linker directives.
8153
8154 @end table
8155
8156 @ifclear GENERIC
8157 @lowersections
8158 @end ifclear
8159 @end ifset
8160
8161 @ifset XTENSA
8162 @ifclear GENERIC
8163 @raisesections
8164 @end ifclear
8165
8166 @node Xtensa
8167 @section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
8168
8169 @cindex Xtensa processors
8170 The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
8171 @code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
8172 specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
8173 keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
8174 example, with the command:
8175
8176 @smallexample
8177 SECTIONS
8178 @{
8179 .text : @{
8180 *(.literal .text)
8181 @}
8182 @}
8183 @end smallexample
8184
8185 @noindent
8186 @command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
8187 and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
8188 literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid
8189 interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
8190 group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
8191 files. Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
8192 and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
8193
8194 @cindex @option{--relax} on Xtensa
8195 @cindex relaxing on Xtensa
8196 Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of @command{ld} and
8197 provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
8198 is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
8199 literal will be removed and all the @code{L32R} instructions that use it
8200 will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
8201 location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
8202 the @code{L32R} instructions. The second optimization is to remove
8203 unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
8204 @code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target functions are within
8205 range of direct @code{CALL@var{n}} instructions.
8206
8207 For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be optimized
8208 to a direct call, the linker will change the @code{CALLX@var{n}}
8209 instruction to a @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction, remove the @code{L32R}
8210 instruction, and remove the literal referenced by the @code{L32R}
8211 instruction if it is not used for anything else. Removing the
8212 @code{L32R} instruction always reduces code size but can potentially
8213 hurt performance by changing the alignment of subsequent branch targets.
8214 By default, the linker will always preserve alignments, either by
8215 switching some instructions between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent
8216 density instructions or by inserting a no-op in place of the @code{L32R}
8217 instruction that was removed. If code size is more important than
8218 performance, the @option{--size-opt} option can be used to prevent the
8219 linker from widening density instructions or inserting no-ops, except in
8220 a few cases where no-ops are required for correctness.
8221
8222 The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
8223 control the linker:
8224
8225 @cindex Xtensa options
8226 @table @option
8227 @item --size-opt
8228 When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code size
8229 more than performance. With this option, the linker will not insert
8230 no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch target
8231 alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are required to
8232 preserve the correctness of the code.
8233 @end table
8234
8235 @ifclear GENERIC
8236 @lowersections
8237 @end ifclear
8238 @end ifset
8239
8240 @ifclear SingleFormat
8241 @node BFD
8242 @chapter BFD
8243
8244 @cindex back end
8245 @cindex object file management
8246 @cindex object formats available
8247 @kindex objdump -i
8248 The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
8249 These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
8250 object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
8251 format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
8252 it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
8253 associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
8254 object file formats available. You can use @code{objdump -i}
8255 (@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
8256 list all the formats available for your configuration.
8257
8258 @cindex BFD requirements
8259 @cindex requirements for BFD
8260 As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
8261 several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
8262 BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
8263 formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
8264 been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
8265 BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
8266 may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
8267
8268 One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
8269 mind is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
8270 useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
8271 conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
8272
8273 @menu
8274 * BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
8275 @end menu
8276
8277 @node BFD outline
8278 @section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
8279 @cindex opening object files
8280 @include bfdsumm.texi
8281 @end ifclear
8282
8283 @node Reporting Bugs
8284 @chapter Reporting Bugs
8285 @cindex bugs in @command{ld}
8286 @cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
8287
8288 Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
8289
8290 Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
8291 it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
8292 to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
8293 work better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
8294 @command{ld}.
8295
8296 In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
8297 information that enables us to fix the bug.
8298
8299 @menu
8300 * Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
8301 * Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
8302 @end menu
8303
8304 @node Bug Criteria
8305 @section Have You Found a Bug?
8306 @cindex bug criteria
8307
8308 If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
8309
8310 @itemize @bullet
8311 @cindex fatal signal
8312 @cindex linker crash
8313 @cindex crash of linker
8314 @item
8315 If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
8316 @command{ld} bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
8317
8318 @cindex error on valid input
8319 @item
8320 If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
8321
8322 @cindex invalid input
8323 @item
8324 If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
8325 may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
8326 object files are correct.
8327
8328 @item
8329 If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
8330 improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
8331 @end itemize
8332
8333 @node Bug Reporting
8334 @section How to Report Bugs
8335 @cindex bug reports
8336 @cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
8337
8338 A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
8339 products. If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
8340 recommend you contact that organization first.
8341
8342 You can find contact information for many support companies and
8343 individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
8344 distribution.
8345
8346 @ifset BUGURL
8347 Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
8348 @value{BUGURL}.
8349 @end ifset
8350
8351 The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
8352 @strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
8353 fact or leave it out, state it!
8354
8355 Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
8356 problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
8357 assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
8358 matter. Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps
8359 the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
8360 location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
8361 were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
8362 into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
8363 specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
8364 and the most helpful.
8365
8366 Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
8367 the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
8368 on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
8369
8370 Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
8371 bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
8372 respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
8373 You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
8374
8375 To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
8376
8377 @itemize @bullet
8378 @item
8379 The version of @command{ld}. @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
8380 the @samp{--version} argument.
8381
8382 Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
8383 the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
8384
8385 @item
8386 Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
8387 patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
8388
8389 @item
8390 The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
8391 version number.
8392
8393 @item
8394 What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
8395 ``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
8396
8397 @item
8398 The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
8399 observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important,
8400 list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
8401 sufficient.
8402
8403 If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
8404 and then we might not encounter the bug.
8405
8406 @item
8407 A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
8408 bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
8409 provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than 10K. For
8410 bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
8411 state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
8412 requests them. (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
8413 we do not want to clog it up with large attachments). But small
8414 attachments are best.
8415
8416 If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
8417 @code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
8418 object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
8419 @code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files. Also say
8420 how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
8421
8422 @item
8423 A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
8424 incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
8425
8426 Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
8427 will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
8428 not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
8429 a chance to make a mistake.
8430
8431 Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
8432 say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
8433 copy of @command{ld} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the
8434 C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash
8435 and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
8436 fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us. If
8437 you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
8438 any conclusion from our observations.
8439
8440 @item
8441 If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
8442 diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
8443 @samp{-p} option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
8444 If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
8445 context, not by line number.
8446
8447 The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
8448 sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
8449 @end itemize
8450
8451 Here are some things that are not necessary:
8452
8453 @itemize @bullet
8454 @item
8455 A description of the envelope of the bug.
8456
8457 Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
8458 which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
8459 changes will not affect it.
8460
8461 This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
8462 will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
8463 with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
8464 We recommend that you save your time for something else.
8465
8466 Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
8467 of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
8468 output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
8469 less time, and so on.
8470
8471 However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
8472 report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
8473
8474 @item
8475 A patch for the bug.
8476
8477 A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
8478 the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
8479 a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
8480 to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
8481
8482 Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
8483 construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
8484 through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be
8485 able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
8486 fixed.
8487
8488 And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
8489 patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
8490 help us to understand.
8491
8492 @item
8493 A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
8494
8495 Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
8496 things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
8497 @end itemize
8498
8499 @node MRI
8500 @appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
8501 @cindex MRI compatibility
8502 To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
8503 linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
8504 alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
8505 described in @ref{Scripts}. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
8506 simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
8507 @command{ld}. @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
8508 linker commands; these commands are described here.
8509
8510 In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
8511 file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
8512 features to make use of them.
8513
8514 You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
8515 @samp{-c} command-line option.
8516
8517 Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
8518 command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
8519 blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
8520 MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
8521 issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
8522
8523 Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
8524
8525 You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
8526 lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
8527 The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
8528
8529 @table @code
8530 @cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
8531 @item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
8532 @itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
8533 Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
8534 the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
8535 @code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
8536 your output program. If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
8537 script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
8538 commands will appear in the linker output. You can still use other
8539 input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
8540 @code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
8541
8542 @cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
8543 @item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
8544 Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
8545 in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
8546
8547 @var{in-secname} may be an integer.
8548
8549 @cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
8550 @item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
8551 Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}. The
8552 @var{expression} should be a power of two.
8553
8554 @cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
8555 @item BASE @var{expression}
8556 Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
8557 absolute addresses) in the output file.
8558
8559 @cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
8560 @item CHIP @var{expression}
8561 @itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
8562 This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
8563
8564 @cindex @code{END} (MRI)
8565 @item END
8566 This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
8567
8568 @cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
8569 @item FORMAT @var{output-format}
8570 Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
8571 language, but restricted to one of these output formats:
8572
8573 @enumerate
8574 @item
8575 S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
8576
8577 @item
8578 IEEE, if @var{output-format} is @samp{IEEE}
8579
8580 @item
8581 COFF (the @samp{coff-m68k} variant in BFD), if @var{output-format} is
8582 @samp{COFF}
8583 @end enumerate
8584
8585 @cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
8586 @item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
8587 Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
8588 @command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
8589
8590 The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
8591 same line, with no change in its effect.
8592
8593 @cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
8594 @item LOAD @var{filename}
8595 @itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
8596 Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
8597 same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
8598 command line.
8599
8600 @cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
8601 @item NAME @var{output-name}
8602 @var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
8603 MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
8604 option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
8605
8606 @cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
8607 @item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
8608 @itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
8609 Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
8610 order in which they first appear in the input files. In an MRI-compatible
8611 script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command. The
8612 sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
8613 file, in the order specified.
8614
8615 @cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
8616 @item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
8617 @itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
8618 @itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
8619 Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
8620 @var{name} used in the linker input files.
8621
8622 @cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
8623 @item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
8624 @itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
8625 @itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
8626 You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
8627 specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
8628 If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
8629 @var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
8630 @end table
8631
8632 @node GNU Free Documentation License
8633 @appendix GNU Free Documentation License
8634 @include fdl.texi
8635
8636 @node LD Index
8637 @unnumbered LD Index
8638
8639 @printindex cp
8640
8641 @tex
8642 % I think something like @@colophon should be in texinfo. In the
8643 % meantime:
8644 \long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
8645 \centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
8646 \centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
8647 \centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
8648 \centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
8649 \centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
8650 \centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
8651 \centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
8652 \page\colophon
8653 % Blame: doc@@cygnus.com, 28mar91.
8654 @end tex
8655
8656 @bye
This page took 0.192228 seconds and 3 git commands to generate.